FCC ID: PKW-WSB24-1 Wireless Router with Booster

by: Cisco-Linksys, LLC latest update: 2002-12-24 model: WSB24-1

One grant has been issued under this FCC ID on 12/24/2002 (this is one of thirty-three releases in 2002 for this grantee). Public details available include internal & external photos, frequency information, and manuals. some products also feature user submitted or linked password defaults, drivers, warrantee terms, instructions, & troubleshooting guides.

permalink for this FCC identifier

search for: Repair details

from iFixIt

Trade-in? Recycling locations

eg for Slack usage

all	frequencies			exhibits	applications
		manuals

all exhibits 10
1 ~ 2002-12-24 10

app s				submitted / available
1	users manual 1	Users Manual	pdf	2.70 MiB
1	users manual 2	Users Manual	pdf	2.67 MiB
1		External Photos	pdf
1		Internal Photos	pdf
1		ID Label/Location Info	pdf
1		ID Label/Location Info	pdf
1		Cover Letter(s)	pdf
1		Operational Description	pdf
1		Test Report	pdf
1		Test Setup Photos	pdf

exhibit
download
text

users manual 1

Users Manual

pdf

2.70 MiB

wsb24 quick install-2.qxd 2002/12/20 U 04:07 Page 1 Instant Wireless Wireless Signal Booster WSB24-1 Package Contents One Linksys Wireless Signal Booster Two Signal Booster Cables Two Power Adapters One Quick Installation and User Guide One Wireless Router, BEFW11S4 Note: The images in this document show the Wireless Signal Booster being con-

nected to an Access Point; the same directions can be followed when connecting the Wireless Signal Booster to a wireless Router. Connecting the Wireless Signal Booster to Your Linksys Access Point/Router A. With your Access Point/Router powered off, place the Wireless Signal Booster on top of the Access Point/Router. B. Disconnect the Access Points/Routers antennas. D. Connect the antennas to the Wireless Signal Boosters antenna ports. B C. Connect the Signal Booster Cables from the Access Points/Routers anten-

na ports to the Wireless Signal Boosters cable ports. The Wireless Signal Booster with Access Point C D E. Connect the appropriate power adapters to both the Access Point/Router and Wireless Signal Booster. E F. Now you are ready to use the Wireless Signal Booster in your wireless network. W W W . L I N K S Y S . C O M QI-WSB24-10/25/02NC BW wsb24 quick install-2.qxd 2002/12/20 U 04:07 Page 2 COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS Copyright c 2002 Linksys, All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks and brand names are the property of their respective proprietors. LIMITED WARRANTY Linksys guarantees that every Wireless Signal Booster WSB24-1 is free from physi-

cal defects in material and workmanship under normal use for one years from the date of purchase. If the product proves defective during this warranty period, call Linksys Customer Support in order to obtain a Return Authorization Number. BE SURE TO HAVE YOUR PROOF OF PURCHASE ON HAND WHEN CALLING. RETURN REQUESTS CANNOT BE PROCESSED WITHOUT PROOF OF PUR-

CHASE. When returning a product, mark the Return Authorization Number clearly on the outside of the package and include a copy of your original proof of purchase. All customers outside of the United States of America and Canada shall be held responsible for shipping and handling charges. IN NO EVENT SHALL LINKSYS LIABILITY EXCEED THE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT FROM DEFECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSE-

QUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, ITS ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE, OR ITS DOCUMENTATION. LINKSYS DOES NOT ISSUE REFUNDS. WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER NATURAL DISASTERS OR ACTS OF NATURE. Linksys makes no warranty or representation, expressed, implied, or statutory, with respect to its products or the contents use of this documentation and all accompany-

ing software, and specially disclaims its quality, performance, merchantability, or fit-

ness for any particular purpose. Linksys reserves the right to revise or update its products, software, or documentation without obligation to notify any individual or entity. Please direct all inquiries to :

Linksys P.O.Box 18558, Irvine, CA 92623 CAUTION : ANY CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED IN THIS MANUAL COULD VOID YOUR AUTHORIZATION TO USE THIS DEVICE. This device should be operated at least 2.0m away from any person FCC STATEMENT The Wireless Signal Booster WSB24-1 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equip-

ment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Regulatory information / Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications (including the antennas) made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television inter-

ference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitution of the connecting cables and equipment other than manufacturer specified. It is the respon-

sibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modifica-

tion, substitution or attachment. Manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distribu-

tors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failing to comply with these guidelines. CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCCsRF exposure guidelines, this equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body. Use on the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations. MPE Statement (Safety Information) Your device contains a low power transmitter. When device is transmitted it sends out Radio Frequency (RF) signal. Safety Information In order to maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, this equip-

ment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body. Use only with supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations. Caution Statement of the FCC Radio Frequency Exposure This Wireless LAN radio device has been evaluated under FCC Bulletin OET 65C and found compliant to the requirements as set forth in CFR 47 Sections 2.1091, 2.1093, and 15.247(b)(4) addressing RF Exposure from radio frequency devices. The radiation output power of this Wireless LAN device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, this device shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation-as a mobile or portable device but use in a body-worn way is strictly prohibit. When using this device, a cer-

tain separation distance between antenna and nearby persons has to be kept to ensure RF exposure compliance. In order to comply with the RF exposure limits established in the ANSI C95.1 standards, the distance between the antennas and the user should not be less than 20cm. Contact Information For help with the installation or operation of this product, contact Linksys Technical Support at one of the phone numbers or Internet addresses below. Sales Information Technical Support RMA Issues Fax Email Web FTP Site 800-546-5797 (LINKSYS) 800-326-7114 949-261-1288 949-261-8868 support@linksys.com http://www.linksys.com ftp.linksys.com Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Use this Guide to install:

BEFW11S4 Fast Start Guide EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPE) Linksys Group declares that the Instant Wireless Series products included in the Instant Wireless Series conform to the specifications listed below, following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC:

ETS 300-826, 301 489-1 General EMC requirements for Radio equipment. EN 609 50 Safety ETS 300-328-2 Technical requirements for Radio equipment. Note: This equipment is intended to be used in all EU and EFTA countries. Outdoor use may be restricted to certain frequencies and/or may require a license for operation. For more details, contact Linksys Corporate Compliance. Note: Combinations of power levels and antennas resulting in a radiated power level of above 100 mW are considered as not compliant with the above mentioned directive and are not allowed for use within the European community and countries that have adopted the European R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC and/or the CEPT recommendation Rec 70.03. For more details on legal combinations of power levels and antennas, contact Linksys Corporate Compliance.

Linksys Group vakuuttaa tten ett Instant Wireless IEEE 802.11 PC Card tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY, direktiivin 89/336/EEC ja direktiivin 73/23/EEC oleellis-

Belgique B Lutilisation en extrieur est autoris sur le canal 11 (2462 MHz), 12 (2467 MHz), et 13 (2472 MHz). Dans le cas dune utilisation prive, lextrieur dun btiment, au-dessus dun espace public, aucun enregistrement nest ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de lIBPT est requise. Pour une utilisation publique lextrieur de btiments, une licence de lIBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter lIBPT. France F: Bande de frquence restreinte: seuls les canaux 10, 11, 12, 13 (2457, 2462, 2467, et 2472 MHz respectivement) doivent tre utiliss en France. Toute util-

isation, qu'elle soit intrieure ou extrieure, est soumise autorisation. Vous pouvez contacter l'Autorit de Rgulation des Tlcommuniations (http://www.art-telecom.fr) pour la procdure suivre. France F: Restricted frequency band: only channels 10, 11, 12, 13 (2457, 2462, 2467, and 2472 MHz respectively) may be used in France. License required for every indoor and outdoor installations. Please contact ART for procedure to follow.

Deutschland D: Anmeldung im Outdoor-Bereich notwending, aber nicht genehmi-

gungspflichtig. Bitte mit Hndler die Vorgehensweise abstimmen.

Germany D: License required for outdoor installations. Check with reseller for proce-

dure to follow. Italia I: E' necessaria la concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso interno. Verificare con i rivenditori la procedura da seguire. L'uso per installazione in esterni non e' per-

Nederlands NL Licentie verplicht voor gebruik met buitenantennes. Neem contact op met verkoper voor juiste procedure. Table of Contents English Franais Deutsch Italiano Portuguese Espaol 2 30 58 86 114 142 1 COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS Copyright 2002 Linksys, All Rights Reserved. Instant Wireless is a trademark of Linksys. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and brand names are the property of their respective proprietors. FCC STATEMENT The Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These rules are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turn-

ing the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

Increase the separation between the equipment or devices

Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receivers

Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance Table of Contents Introduction Step 1: Connect the Router Step 2: Configure the PCs Step 3: Configure the Router Help Configuring Wireless Security Configuring Wireless Security in Windows XP 4 6 8 12 16 21 24 For product support and product registration, contact us at the addresses below:

E-mail Web europe-support@linksys.com latam-soporte@linksys.com http://www.linksys.com/international FSG-BEFW11S4 ver. 3-21008 TE 2 3 Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Introduction Thank you for choosing the Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router. This Router will allow you to set up a network with your PCs and even share your Internet connection. How does the Router do all of this? By connecting your cable or DSL modem directly to the Router and using the Router's Ethernet ports to connect your PCs, it's almost as if each PC is connected directly to the Internet. In this way, you can have several PCs utilizing one Internet connection simultaneously. Plus, because it's also an Access Point, the Router can bridge your Ethernet network with your wireless PCs. But what does all of this mean?

Networks are useful tools for sharing computer resources. You can access one printer from different computers and access data located on another computer's hard drive. Networks are even used for playing multiplayer video games. So, net-

works are not only useful in homes and offices, they can also be fun. The PCs you connect to the Router's four LAN ports, when properly configured, create a LAN, or Local Area Network. They are connected with an Ethernet cable plugged into your computer's Ethernet adapter at one end and into one of the Router's LAN ports (numbered from one to four) at the other end. The term

"Ethernet" is used to refer to your network accessories, such as cables and adapters, because Ethernet refers to the type of network you are setting up. In your Router's documentation, Ethernet refers to accessories that transfer computer data from 10Mbps to 100Mbps. (10Mbps and 100Mbps refer to the speeds used by network devices. When transferring data at 10Mbps, you are moving the equiv-

alent of over seven floppy disks every second! Network accessories that function at 100Mbps move data ten times faster!) PCs can also interact with the Router wirelessly. By configuring your wireless PCs with the same wireless settings as the Router, you can bridge these wireless PCs while integrating them into your existing Ethernet network. Perhaps the most remarkable thing the Router does is to allow you to share your cable or DSL connection. This is done by connecting your cable or DSL modem to the Router's WAN port with an Ethernet cable. (WAN refers to a Wide Area Network.) The Internet is a network that, being global, covers the widest area of all! The PCs connected to the Router share this connection. 4 Use the instructions in this Fast Start to help you connect the Router, configure your PCs, and configure the Router in your network. These instructions should be all you need to get you up and running with a basic network, sharing your Internet access. The Router also comes equipped with more advanced functions, but these functions should not be utilized without a further understanding of routers and networks. These and other issues are explained in the User Guide on the Setup Wizard CD-ROM. This is What You Will Be Setting Up The Routers setup is similar to that shown in the figure above for any Windows PC. The Router lets you share your cable or DSL connection among several computers in your home or business. This is called a Local Area Network or LAN. This Fast Start guide gives you the big picture of what you need to set up a basic home or business network. The next three sections explain how you will set up and configure your equipment to enable shared high-speed access to the Internet. Step 1: Connect the Router This walks you through the process of connecting the Router to your cable or DSL modem. Then, it shows you how your PCs are connected to the Router. Step 2: Configure the PCs This describes how your PCs are configured to communicate with the Router. Step 3: Configure the Router This step walks you through some basic Router settings, making it work with your cable or DSL modem and your ISPs settings. NNoottee::This Fast Start Guide will direct you how to set up the Router with Ethernet cables. While the Router can be set up through a wireless connec-

tion, details about setting up the Router wirelessly will not be addressed in this Fast Start Guide. Those who wish to set up the Router through their wire-

less connection should refer to the Linksys website at www.linksys.com. 5 Step 1: Connect the Router Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch B. Using an Ethernet cable, connect the LAN or Ethernet port of the cable or DSL modem to the Routers WAN port. In Step 1, you will connect the Router to your cable or DSL modem and to your home or business computers. First, make sure that all devices youll be working with are powered down, includ-

ing your PCs, modem, and the Router. A. If you havent already done so, connect your cable or DSL modem to its prop-

er connectionthe coaxial jack for cable (Figure A1), or the phone jack for DSL

(Figure A2). (Follow the instructions from your cable or DSL modems installa-

tion guide.) B C. Connect an Ethernet cable to your PCs Ethernet adapter. Connect the other end of the cable to one of the Routers LAN ports. Repeat this process for every PC you wish to connect to the Router. C1 Note: If your PCs Ethernet adapter is not set up, please refer to the Ethernet adapters documentation for more information. For ease of installation, start with LAN Port 1 on the Router, then Port 2, Port 3, and finally Port 4. If you are connecting more than four PCs to the Router, you will need to con-

nect a hub or switch to the Routers Uplink port (if you use the Uplink port, then you cannot use Port 4). For infor-

mation on Uplinking, please refer to the User Guide located on the Setup Wizard CD-ROM. C2 D. Connect the power adapter to the Routers Power port. Then, connect the power adapter to an electrical outlet. Turn on the cable or DSL modem. Then turn on the first PC you wish to use when configuring the Router. Proceed to Step 2: Configure the PCs on the next page. 7 A1 6 A2 Step 2: Configure the PCs Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch If you are running:

Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me In Step 2, you will configure each of your computers to communicate with the Router. To do this, you will need to configure your PCs network settings to obtain an IP (or TCP/IP) address automatically. Computers use IP addresses to communicate with each other across a network or the Internet. Find out which operating system your computer is running, such as Windows 95, 98, Millennium, 2000, or XP. You will need to know which operating system your computer is running. You can find out by clicking the Start button and then select-

ing the Settings option. (If your Start menu doesnt have a Settings option, youre running Windows XP. You can select the Control Panel directly from the Start Menu.) Then, click Control Panel and double-click the System icon. Click the Cancel button when done. Once you know which Windows operating system you are running, follow the directions in this step for your computers operating system. You may need to do this for each computer you are connecting to the Router. The next few pages tell you, step by step, how to configure your TCP/IP settings based on the type of Windows operating system you are using. Once you've con-

figured your computers, continue to Step 3: Configure the Router. A. Click the Start button, click Settings and open the Control Panel. From there, dou-

ble-click the Network icon to open the Network screen. B. Select the Configuration tab and highlight the TCP/IP line for the applicable Ethernet adapter*. If the word TCP/IP appears by itself, select that line**. Then, click the Properties button. B C. Click the IP Address tab and select Obtain an IP address automatically. D. Click the Gateway tab and verify that the Installed Gateway field is blank. Click the OK button. E. Click the OK button again. Windows may ask you for the original Windows installa-

tion disk or additional files. Supply them by pointing to the correct file location, e.g., D:\win98, D:\win9x, c:\windows\options\cabs, etc. (This assumes that D is the letter of your CD-ROM drive). C F. If Windows asks you to restart your PC, click the Yes button. If Windows does not ask you to restart, restart your computer anyway.

*Note: Do not choose a TCP/IP entry whose name mentions DUN, PPPoE, VPN, or AOL.

**Note: If there is no TCP/IP line listed, refer to the User Guide found on the Setup Wizard CD-ROM or your Ethernet adapters documentation to install TCP/IP now. 8 9 If you are running:

Windows 2000 A. Click the Start button, click Settings and open the Control Panel. From there, dou-

the Network and Dial-up ble-click Connections icon. This will display the Network screen. B. Select the Local Area Connection icon for the applicable Ethernet adapter* (usually it is the first Local Area Connection listed). Double-click Local Area Connection. C. When the Local Area Connection Status screen appears, click the Properties but-

ton. D. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click the Properties button. E. Select Obtain an IP address automatical-

ly and click the OK button on the subse-

quent screens to complete the PCs config-

uration. F. Restart your computer.

*Note: Do not choose a TCP/IP entry whose name mentions DUN, PPPoE, VPN, or AOL. C D E Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch If you are running:

Windows XP The following instructions assume you are run-

ning Windows XPs default interface. If you are using the Classic interface (where the icons and menus look like previous Windows ver-

sions), please follow the instructions for Windows 2000. A. Click the Start button, open the Control Panel. and click the Network and Internet Connections icon. Then, click the Network Connections icon to display the Network screen. C B. Select the Local Area Connection icon for the applicable Ethernet adapter (usually it is the first Local Area Connection listed). Double-click Local Area Connection. C. When the Local Area Connection Status screen appears, click the Properties but-

ton. D. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click the Properties button. D E. Select Obtain an IP address automati-

cally and click the OK button on the subse-

quent screens to complete the PCs config-

uration. F. Restart your computer. E 10 11 Step 3: Configure the Router C. If required by your ISP, enter the Routers Host Name and Domain Name in the appropriate fields on the Setup tab. (This is usually required by cable ISPs.) Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch In Step 3, you will configure the Router to function in your network and gain access to the Internet through your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Your ISP may require the use of a Host Name and Domain Name. Further, you will set the WAN Configuration Type on the Routers Setup tab from the information given by your ISP. You will need this setup information from your ISP.If you do not have this infor-

mation, please contact your ISP before proceeding. To find out what questions you should ask your ISP, refer to question #1 in the Help section. The instructions from your ISP tell you how to set up your PC for Internet access. Since you are now using the Router to share Internet access among several com-

puters, you will use this setup information for Router configuration. A. Open your web browser. (Its all right if you get an error message at this point. Continue following these instructions) Enter 192.168.1.1 into the web brows-

ers Address field and press the Enter key. A B. An Enter Network Password window, shown in Figure B1, will appear.

(Windows XP users will see a Connect to 192.168.1.1 window, shown in Figure B2.) Leave the User Name field empty, and enter admin (the default password) in lowercase letters in the Password field. Then, click the OK button. D. To configure the Router for your wireless network, verify that the Setup tabs Wireless fields (shown in Figure D) are completed as follows:

Enable/Disable: Selecting the Enable radio button will enable the Routers wireless feature. Wireless functions will not be available unless enabled. SSID: The SSID (or ESSID) is a unique name for your wire-

less network. It is case sen-

ed. All wireless points in your network must use the same channel in order to function properly. NNoottee:: If you are interested in changing the Routers WEP set-

tings, turn to the section for Configuring Wireless Security. E. The Router supports five connection types: DHCP (obtain an IP automatically), PPPoE, Static IP Address, RAS, and PPTP. These types are selected from the pull-down menu beside WAN Connection Type. The Setup screen and avail-

able features will differ depending on what kind of connection type you select, the instructions for which are included here:

1. Obtain an IP Automatically If your ISP says that you are connecting through a dynamic IP address (or DHCP), perform these steps:

a. Select Obtain an IP automatically as the WAN Connection Type (as previous-

ly shown in Figure D). B1 12 B2 b. Click the Apply button to save the settings. 13 Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch 4. RAS RAS is a service used in Singapore only. If you are using a RAS connection, check with your ISP for the necessary setup information. 5. PPTP PPTP is a service used in Europe only. If you are using a PPTP con-

nection, check with your ISP for the necessary setup information. 2. Static IP If your ISP says that you are con-

necting through a static (or fixed) IP address, perform these steps:

a. Select Static IP as the WAN Connection Type. b. In the fields beside Specify WAN IP Address, enter the IP Address. c. Enter the Subnet Mask. d. Enter the Default Gateway Address. E2 e. Enter the DNS in the 1, 2, and/or 3 fields. You must enter at least one DNS address. f. Click the Apply button to save the settings. 3. PPPoE If your DSL provider says that you are connecting through PPPoE or if you normally enter a user name and password to access the Internet, perform these steps:

a. Select PPPoE as the WAN Connection Type. b. Enter the User Name. c. Enter the Password. d. Click the Apply button to save the settings. E3 e. Click the Status tab, followed by the Connect button, to start the connection. 14 E5 F. If you havent already done so, click the Apply button to save the settings. G. Reset the power on your cable or DSL modem and restart your computers. They will now obtain the Router's new settings. Note: You only need to configure the Router from one computer. If you need advanced setting information, please refer to the Linksys support website at support.linksys.comor the User Guide on the Setup Wizard CD-ROM. Congratulations! Youve successfully configured the Router. You can test the setup by opening your web browser from any computer and entering www.linksys.com/registration. If you are unable to reach our website, you may want to review what you did in this section or refer to the Help section in this Fast Start guide. 15 Help Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch

The Help section contains the most frequently asked Internet connection ques-

tions. If you have additional setup needs or you wish to get information on the Advanced Features, please visit kb.linksys.comor see the User Guide, which con-

tains a Troubleshooting appendix (available on the Setup Wizard CD-ROM). 1. Im not sure what information I need from my Internet Service Provider

(ISP) to get my network up and running. What questions should I ask?

What type of connection do I have: dynamic IP address, static IP address, or PPPoE?

If I am using a dynamic IP address, I should ask:

What is my Host Name (if needed)?

What is my Domain Name (if needed)?

If I am using a static IP address, I should ask:

What is my IP Address?

What is my Gateway?

What is my DNS?

If I am using PPPoE (typically used by DSL ISPs), I should ask:

What is my User Name?

What is my Password?

After you obtain the information, follow the instructions in the Fast Start - Step 3:

Configure the Router, and use this information to enter on the Setup tab. In the WAN Connection Type section, refer to the chart on the next page:

If you have this type of connection:

Dynamic IP Address (DHCP) Static IP Address PPPoE RAS or PPTP Perform these steps:

1. Select Obtain an IP automatically as the WAN Connection Type. 2. Click the Apply button to save the setting. 1. Select Static IP as the WAN Connection Type. 2. Enter the IP Address. 3. Enter the Subnet Mask. 4. Enter the Gateway Address. 5. Enter the DNS in the 1, 2, and/or 3 fields. You need to enter at least one DNS address. 6. Click the Apply button to save the settings. 1. Select PPPoE as the WAN Connection Type. 2. Enter the User Name. 3. Enter the Password. 4. Click the Apply button to save the settings. If you are using RAS (Singapore SingTel) or PPTP (service in Europe), check with your ISP for the necessary setup information. 2. Im having problems connecting to the Internet, what LEDs should be lit on the front of the Router?

Each Routers LED will light up for any proper connection made on the back of the Routerwhether it is an Ethernet cable or power cord. For example, the following are typical LEDs that light up once a computer and a cable or DSL modem are connected:

When the Router is turned on (the power adapter is plugged into the Router), the PowerLED lights up. When an Ethernet cable is properly connected between a PC and Port 4 of the Router, the Link/Act, Ful/Col, and 100LEDs in Column 4 light up. A cable or DSL modem connection causes the WAN LinkLED to light up. 16 17 Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch

My WAN LinkLED isnt lit. What should I check?

Check that the cable you are using between your cable or DSL modem and the Router is the same cable that came with your modem. Depending on the type of connection your modem uses, you may need either a straight-through or crossover Ethernet cable (the straight-through type is more common).

Some of the lights on the front of the Router dont light up when I plug in a PC.

Only the Link/ActLED is required for a connection to work correctly. 3. I cannot get onto the Internet, nor can I access the Routers Setup page. What should I check?

A. First check that the cable or DSL modem and computers are properly con-

nected to the Router. See Question #2 for how to verify that the connections are good. B. Then, check that you have properly configured your PCs to communicate with the Router. Below you will find instructions for the various versions of Windows.

The IP Address field should show an IP address of 192.168.1.100 or 192.168.1.xxx, with xxx being any number greater than 100. If your IP address is not in that range, hold the reset button on the front of the Router for more than 30 seconds. This will cause your Router to be set to factory default, so you will need to re-configure the Router's Setup page. After re-configuring the Setup page, restart the computer. C. Now you will configure some settings in Windows.

- Go to your desktop and double-click My Computer, and then double-click Control Panel (Windows XP users using the default interface, click Start, and then select Control Panel).

- When the Control Panel window pops up, double-click the Internet Options icon (Windows XP users using the default interface, click Network and Internet Connections, and then click Internet Options).

- When the Internet Options window appears, click the Connections tab.

- Check Never Dial Up a Connection. (If this choice is grayed out, that is fine.)

- Click the LAN Settings button in the lower right-hand corner.

- When the Local Area Network (LAN) Settings window appears, uncheck all boxes.

- Click the OK button and the Apply button (the Apply button will be grayed out if you did not have to make any changes). Then click the OK button again.

- Windows 95, 98, or ME

- Exit the Control Panel, and restart your computer.

Click the Start menu, and then click Run. After the Run window appears, enter winipcfg in the Open field, and then click the OK button. When the IP Configuration window appears, click the gray box with a black arrow pointing down. A list of adapters will appear. Select the adapter that you use to connect to the Internet. These items should not contain PPP, VPN, AOL, or Dial-Up adapter as part of the entry. The IP Address field should show an IP address of 192.168.1.100 or 192.168.1.xxx, with xxx being any number greater than 100. If your IP address is not in that range, hold the reset button on the front of the Router for more than 30 seconds. This will cause your Router to be set to factory default, so you will need to re-configure the Router's Setup page. After re-configuring the Setup page, restart the computer.

- Windows NT, 2000, and XP

Click the Start menu, and then click Run. After the Run window appears, enter cmd in the Open field, and then click the OK button. This will open a command prompt. Enter ipconfig /all and then press the Enter key. 18 4. When I click on the icon to access the Internet, and enter the user name and password that my ISP gave me, I cannot connect to the Internet. What is wrong?

This means that youre using the software given to you by your ISP. Please use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator, which is located on your desktop (located on the Start Menu in Windows XP). 5. When I use Internet Explorer, a box pops up prompting me to dial up a connection. How can I disable that?

A. Go to your desktop and double-click My Computer, and then double-click Control Panel (Windows XP users using the default interface, click Start, and then select Control Panel). B. When the Control Panel window pops up, double-click the Internet Options icon (Windows XP users using the default interface, click Network and Internet Connections, and then click Internet Options). C. When the Internet Options window appears, click the Connections tab. 19 Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch D. Check Never Dial Up a Connection. E. Click the Apply button. F. Click the OK button. 6. I get no signal strength or link quality or signal strength, what can I do?

A. Verify that the Routers WLAN LED is illuminated. B. Verify that all of your wireless PCs are using Infrastructure mode. 7. How can I improve the Routers range?

A. Verify that the Router is as high off of the ground as possible. B. Verify that there are no large sources of electrical interference nearby. (For example: speakers breaker boxes, florescent lights, microwaves, etc.) C. Change the wireless channel being used. To do this:

- Open your web browser and type http://192.168.1.1 into the "Address" field. In the "Enter Network Password" box, leave the "User Name" field blank and

type admin as the password. Then, click OK. From the Setup tab, change the channel to 1. Click the Apply button to save the settings. Continue doing this until you find the channel that provides the best range.

Configuring Wireless Security Note: WEP encryption is an additional data securi-

ty measure and not essential for router operation. An acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy, WEP is an encryption method used to protect your wireless data communications. WEP uses a combination of 64-

bit or 128-bit keys to provide access control to your network and encryption security for every data transmission. To decode a data transmission, each point in a network must use an identical 64-bit or 128-bit key. Higher encryption lev-

els mean higher levels of security, but due to the complexity of the encryption, they may mean decreased network performance. You may also have heard the term 40-bit used in conjunction with WEP encryption. This is simply another term for 64-bit WEP encryption. This level of WEP encryption has been called 40-bit because it uses a 40-bit secret key along with a 24-bit Initialization Vector (40 + 24 = 64). Wireless vendors may use either name. Linksys uses the term 64-bit when referring to this level of encryption. Make sure your wireless network is functioning before attempting to configure WEP encryption. A 128-bit WEP encrypted wireless network will NOT communicate with a 64-

bit WEP encrypted wireless network. Therefore, make sure that all of your wireless devices are using the same encryption level. All wireless devices com-

plying with the 802.11b standard will support 64-bit WEP. In addition to enabling WEP, Linksys also recommends the following security implementations:

Changing the SSID from the default linksys

Changing the WEP key regularly Note: In order for WEP Encryption to be enabled, wireless functions must first be enabled. Select Enable on the Routers Wireless tab before proceeding. 20 21 Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch The following steps will show you how to utilize WEP encryption 1. From the Web-based Utilitys Setup tab, select Mandatory under the WEP section. 2. Press the WEP Key Setting button to set the WEP Encryption type and level. 3. The screen dis-

WEP (64Bit or 128B) Select the level of encryption from the drop-down box. 128-bit WEP encryption is unique to Linksys and may conflict with other vendors WEP encryption. Note: In order to utilize WEP encryption, all points in your wireless network must have WEP enabled and be set to the same Key Setting. The WEP Encryption key is generated in one of two ways:

1. You may create an encryption key by using a Passphrase. a. Enter a Passphrase, a user-defined password, into the Passphrase field. The Passphrase can be a maximum of 31 letters, symbols, and numbers. No spaces can be used. b. Click the Generate button to create a key. The key will be 10 digits if you chose 64-bit encryption, or 26 digits if you chose 128-bit encryption. This key will be used to encrypt and decrypt the data being sent between the Router and your networks wireless PCs. The Key field may not display all digits. Using the mouse, click any-

where within the Key field. Move the cursor to the right to view the rest of the Key. Make sure your write down the entire Key EXACTLY the way it is displayed. 2. You may enter the encryption key manually. Make a note of the Passphrase or Manual Key. You will need it for the other wireless devices on the network, as the same WEP encryption key must be entered in all wireless devices on the network. Once you have chosen your key encryption method and entered either the Passphrase or manual key, click the Apply button, and the encryption portion of the setup is complete. Note: In Windows XP, a 128-bit Key generated by the Router will be called a "104 bits (26 digits)" key, and a 64-bit Key gen-

erated by the Router will be called a 40 bits (10 digits) key. Figure C-2 22 23 Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Configuring Wireless Security in Windows XP As Windows XP does not allow for the use of the Linksys Passphrase feature with the wireless PC adapters, you will need to manually enter the key gener-

ated in the previous section. The following steps will help you enable WEP and enter the encryption key manually for your wireless PC cards, in order to enable your Windows XP sys-

tem to communicate with the Router wirelessly. These steps assume that your CD-ROM drive is letter D and that you are run-

ning Windows XP in the default mode. Be sure you have the WEP Key generated by the Router. 2. In the Control Panel window, click the Network and Internet Connections icon, shown in Figure C-4. Figure C-4 1. As shown in Figure C-3, click the Start button and go to the Control Panel. 3. Click the Network Connections icon, shown in Figure C-5. Figure C-3 Figure C-5 4. The Network Connections window will appear, as shown in Figure C-6. Under LAN or High-Speed Internet you will see all Network cards that are installed and operating in your computer. Double-click the Wireless Network Connection icon associated with your wireless adapter. If the Wireless Network Connection Status window appears, continue to the next step 24 25 Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch If a Connect to Wireless Network window appears, in the Available Networks section, click the desired wireless network, specified by the Routers SSID. Then, double-click the Wireless Network Connection icon. 6. When the Wireless Network Connection Properties window appears, as in Figure C-

8, click the Wireless Networks Tab. Figure C-6 5. When the Wireless Network Connection Status window appears, as in Figure C-7, click the Properties button. Figure C-8 7. in If the appropriate wire-

less network, specified by the Routers SSID, is displayed the Preferred networks section, as shown in Figure C-9, double-

click it and continue to the next step. Otherwise, click on the appropriate wireless network, specified by the Routers SSID, in the net-

works section. Then, the Configure click button Available Figure C-9 27 Figure C-7 26 Instant Wireless Series 8. The Wireless Network Properties window (shown in Figure C-10) will appear. Click the check box for the Data encryption (WEP enabled) option. Remove the check from the Network Authentication (Shared mode) and The key is provided for me automatically fields. In the "Network key" field, enter the exact Key (all 10 or 26 digits, depend-

ing on the level of encryption) generated by the Router. Verify that the Key format field displays Hexadecimal digits and that the Key length field displays either 40 bits (10 digits) or 104 bits (26 digits). If this is not displayed, you have entered the key incorrectly. Figure C-10 Click the OK button to save the settings. Click on OK buttons until you get back to the Wireless Network Connection Status window. Close any open windows to get back to the Windows XP desktop. Close any applications and reboot your PC. After reboot, WEP configuration is complete and you should be able to connect wirelessly to the Router. 28 29 COPYRIGHT ET MARQUES Copyright 2002 Linksys, Tous droits rservs. Instant Wireless est une marque de commerce de Linksys. Microsoft, Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques dposes de Microsoft Corporation. Toutes les autres marques de commerce et tous les autres noms commerciaux appartiennent leurs propritaires respectifs. AVIS DE CONFORMIT FCC Les tests de conformit effectus sur le routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commu-

tateur 4 ports Instant Wireless ont montr quil respecte les limites fixes pour un appareil numrique de classe B en vertu de larticle 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour apporter une protection adquate contre le brouillage radiolectrique prjudiciable des installations rsidentielles. Cet quipement produit, utilise et peut mettre de lnergie radiolectrique et il peut, lorsquil nest pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions donnes, causer un brouillage prjudiciable des radiocommunications. Cependant, rien ne garantit quune installation particulire ne pro-

duira pas de brouillage. Si lappareil venait causer un brouillage prjudiciable de la rception dmissions radio ou tlvisuelles, ce qui peut tre dtermin en lteignant et en le rallumant, nous vous conseillons dessayer dy remdier en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

rorienter ou dplacer lantenne de rception ;

loigner lappareil du rcepteur ;

brancher lappareil et le rcepteur sur des prises de courant diffrentes ;

consulter le revendeur ou un technicien radiotlvision expriment. Table des matires Introduction tape 1 : connexion du routeur tape 2 : configuration des PC tape 3 : configuration du routeur Aide Configuration de la scurit sans fil Configuration de la scurit sans fil dans Windows XP 32 34 36 40 44 49 52 Pour le support produit, contactez-nous aux adresses indiques ci-dessous :

E-mail Web europe-support@linksys.com latam-soporte@linksys.com http://www.linksys.com/international 30 31 Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports Introduction Merci davoir choisi le routeur de point daccs sans fil Instant Wireless. Ce routeur per-

met de relier des PC en rseau et mme de partager une connexion Internet. Comment le routeur procde-t-il ? En connectant votre modem cble ou DSL directement au routeur et en utilisant les ports Ethernet du routeur pour relier vos PC, cest un peu comme si chaque PC tait directement connect Internet. Plusieurs PC peuvent ainsi utiliser simultanment une mme connexion Internet. Le routeur constituant galement un point daccs, il peut tablir un pont entre votre rseau Ethernet et vos PC sans fil. Possibilits offertes Les rseaux constituent de puissants outils pour partager des ressources informatiques. Vous pouvez utiliser une imprimante depuis diffrents ordinateurs et accder aux donnes rsidant sur le disque dur dun autre ordinateur. Les rseaux permettent galement duti-

liser plusieurs des jeux vido. Les rseaux sont donc non seulement trs utiles, mais peuvent galement savrer ludiques. Les PC que vous connectez aux quatre ports de rseau local du routeur, sils sont correcte-

ment configurs, crent un rseau local. Ils sont connects au moyen dun cble Ethernet branch une extrmit sur ladaptateur Ethernet de lordinateur et sur les ports de rseau local du routeur (numrots de 1 4) lautre extrmit. Le terme Ethernet fait rfrence aux accessoires de rseau, tels que cbles et adaptateurs, et dsigne le type de rseau mis en place. Dans la documentation du routeur, Ethernet fait rfrence aux acces-

soires qui transfrent les donnes informatiques un dbit compris entre 10 Mbits/s et 100 Mbits/s. 10 Mbits/s et 100 Mbits/s dsignent les vitesses utilises par les priphriques rseau. Lors dun transfert de donnes 10 Mbits/s, vous transfrez lquivalent de plus de sept disquettes par seconde ! Les accessoires rseau qui fonctionnent 100 Mbits/s offrent des dbits dix fois plus rapides !

Les PC peuvent galement tre raccords au routeur par une connexion sans fil. En confi-

gurant les PC sans fil avec les mmes paramtres sans fil que le routeur, vous pouvez rac-

corder ces PC tout en les intgrant votre rseau Ethernet existant. Mais le routeur permet surtout de partager votre connexion cble ou DSL. Pour cela, il suf-

fit de connecter votre modem cble ou DSL au port WAN du routeur avec un cble Ethernet. Le terme WAN (Wide Area Network) dsigne un rseau tendu. Internet est un rseau glo-

bal couvrant la zone la plus vaste qui soit ! Les PC connects au routeur partagent cette connexion. 32 Utilisez les instructions de ce Guide de dmarrage rapide pour connecter le routeur, configurer vos PC et configurer le routeur sur votre rseau. Ces instructions contiennent toutes les infor-

mations ncessaires la mise en service dun rseau de base avec partage de votre accs Internet. Le routeur est galement quip de fonctions plus avances, mais elles ne doivent pas tre utilises sans une connaissance approfondie des routeurs et des rseaux. Celles-ci, ainsi que dautres sujets, sont abords dans le Guide de lutilisateur figurant sur le CD-ROM Setup Wizard (Assistant Installation). Vue densemble de linstallation La configuration du routeur est similaire celle illustre la figure ci-dessus pour tout PC Windows. Le routeur vous permet de partager votre connexion DSL ou par cble entre plusieurs ordinateurs domicile ou au bureau. Cela sappelle un rseau local ou LAN. Ce Guide de dmarrage rapide vous donne un aperu gnral de ce dont vous avez besoin pour configurer un rseau de base chez vous ou au bureau. Les trois prochaines sections expliquent comment installer et configurer votre quipement pour permettre un accs partag et grande vitesse Internet. tape 1 : connexion du routeur Cette tape vous guide travers la procdure de connexion du routeur votre modem cble ou DSL. Elle explique ensuite comment connecter vos PC au routeur. tape 2 : configuration des PC Cette tape indique comment configurer vos PC pour communiquer avec le routeur. tape 3 : configuration du routeur Cette tape dcrit certains paramtres de base du routeur qui lui permettent de fonctionner avec votre modem cble ou DSL de mme quavec les paramtres de votre ISP. RReemmaarrqquuee :: ce Guide de dmarrage rapide dcrit linstallation du routeur avec des cbles Ethernet. Bien que le routeur puisse tre install au moyen dune connexion sans fil, cette configuration nest pas dcrite dans ce Guide de dmarrage rapide. Si vous souhaitez installer le routeur en employant une connexion sans fil, reportez-vous aux informations prsentes sur le site Web Linksys ladresse www.linksys.com. 33 tape 1 : connexion du routeur B. laide dun cble Ethernet, raccordez le port Ethernet du modem cble ou DSL au port WAN du routeur. Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports ltape1, vous allez connecter le routeur votre modem cble ou DSL, ainsi quaux ordi-

nateurs de votre domicile ou bureau. Vrifiez dabord que tous les appareils que vous utiliserez sont hors tension, notamment les PC, le modem et le routeur. A. Si ce nest dj fait, branchez votre modem cble ou DSL sur la prise adquate : la prise coaxiale pour cble (figure A1) ou la prise tlphonique pour DSL (figure A2). (Suivez les instructions du Guide dinstallation de votre modem cble ou DSL.) B C. Branchez un cble Ethernet sur ladaptateur Ethernet du PC. Branchez lautre extrmit du cble sur lun des ports de rseau local du routeur. Recommencez cette opration pour chaque PC connecter au routeur. C1 Remarque : si ladaptateur Ethernet du PC nest pas install, reportez-vous sa docu-

mentation pour plus dinformations. Pour simplifier linstallation, commencez par le port de rseau local 1 sur le routeur, puis le port 2, le port 3 et enfin le port 4. Si vous connectez plus de quatre PC au rou-

teur, vous devrez connecter un hub ou un commutateur au port de liaison montante

(Uplink) du routeur (si vous utilisez le port de liaison montante, vous ne pouvez pas utili-

ser le port 4). Pour plus dinformations sur les liaisons montantes, reportez-vous au Guide de lutilisateur figurant sur le CD-ROM Setup Wizard (Assistant Installation). C2 D. Branchez ladaptateur de courant sur le port dalimentation du routeur, puis sur une prise lectrique. Mettez le modem cble ou DSL sous tension. Mettez ensuite sous ten-

sion le premier PC utiliser lors de la configuration du routeur. Passez ltape 2 : configuration des PC (page suivante). A1 34 A2 35 tape 2 : configuration des PC Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports Si vous utilisez :

Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me A. Dans le menu Dmarrer, choisissez Paramtres et ouvrez le Panneau de config-

uration. Dans le Panneau de configuration, double-cliquez sur licne Rseau pour ouvrir lcran Rseau. ltape 2, vous allez configurer chacun de vos ordinateurs pour communiquer avec le rou-

teur. Pour cela, vous devrez configurer les paramtres rseau du PC afin dobtenir automatique-

ment une adresse IP (ou TCP/IP). Les ordinateurs emploient des adresses IP pour commu-

niquer entre eux sur un rseau ou sur Internet. Identifiez le systme dexploitation utilis sur votre ordinateur, par exemple Windows 95, 98, Millennium, 2000 ou XP. Vous devez savoir sous quel systme dexploitation votre ordina-

teur fonctionne. Pour cela, cliquez sur le bouton Dmarrer, puis slectionnez loption Paramtres. (Si le menu Dmarrer ne comporte pas doption Paramtres, vous utilisez Windows XP. Vous pouvez accder directement au Panneau de configuration depuis le menu Dmarrer.) Cliquez ensuite sur Panneau de configuration, puis double-cliquez sur licne Systme. Cliquez sur le bouton Annuler une fois que vous avez termin. Une fois que vous connaissez le systme dexploitation Windows utilis, suivez les direc-

tives de cette tape correspondant au systme dexploitation de lordinateur. Vous devrez ventuellement suivre cette procdure pour chaque ordinateur connecter au routeur. Les pages suivantes prsentent la procdure pas pas de configuration des paramtres TCP/IP en fonction du type de systme dexploitation Windows employ. Une fois les ordi-

nateurs configurs, passez ltape 3 : configuration du routeur. B. Slectionnez longlet Configuration et mettez en surbrillance la ligne TCP/IP de ladaptateur Ethernet concern*. Si le mot TCP/IP apparat seul, slectionnez cette ligne**. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton Proprits. C. Cliquez sur longlet Adresse IP et slectionnez Obtenir une adresse IP automatiquement. D. Cliquez sur longlet Passerelle et vrifiez que le champ Passerelles installes est vide. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton OK. E. Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton OK. Windows peut vous demander la disquette dinstallation Windows dorigine ou des fichiers supplmen-

taires. Indiquez leur emplacement, par exemple D:\win98, D:\win9x, c:\windows\options\cabs, etc. Cela suppose que D soit la lettre du lecteur de CD-ROM. B C F. Si Windows vous demande de redmarrer le PC, cliquez sur le bouton Oui. Mme si Windows ne vous le demande pas, redmarrez quand mme lordinateur.

*Remarque : ne choisissez pas une entre TCP/IP dont le nom contient le terme DUN, PPPoE, VPN ou AOL.

**Remarque : si aucune ligne TCP/IP nest rpertorie, reportez-vous au Guide de lutilisa-

teur se trouvant sur le CD-ROM Setup Wizard (Assistant Installation) ou la documen-

tation de votre adaptateur Ethernet pour installer TCP/IP maintenant. 36 37 Si vous utilisez :

Windows 2000 A. Dans le menu Dmarrer, choisissez Paramtres et ouvrez le Panneau de configu-

ration. Double-cliquez sur licne Connexions rseau et accs distance. Lcran Rseau saffiche. B. Slectionnez licne Connexion au rseau local pour ladaptateur Ethernet concern* (il sagit gnralement de la premire connexion au rseau local rpertorie). Double-cliquez sur Connexion au rseau local. C. Lorsque lcran tat de la connexion au rseau local apparat, cliquez sur le bouton Proprits. D. Slectionnez Protocole Internet (TCP/IP) et cliquez sur le bouton Proprits. E. Slectionnez Obtenir une adresse IP automa-

tiquement et cliquez sur le bouton OK dans les crans suivants pour terminer la configuration du PC. F. Redmarrez lordinateur.

*Remarque : ne choisissez pas une entre TCP/IP dont le nom contient le terme DUN, PPPoE, VPN ou AOL. C D E Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports Si vous utilisez :

Windows XP Les instructions suivantes partent du principe que vous utilisez linterface par dfaut de Windows XP. Si vous utilisez linterface classique (dans laquelle les icnes et les menus ressemblent ceux des ver-

sions prcdentes de Windows), veuillez suivre les instructions fournies pour Windows 2000. A. Dans le menu Dmarrer, ouvrez le Panneau de configuration licne Connexions rseau et Internet. Cliquez ensuite sur licne Connexions rseau pour afficher lcran Connexions rseau. cliquez sur et B. Slectionnez licne Connexion au rseau local pour ladaptateur Ethernet concern (il sagit gnralement de la premire connexion au rseau local rpertorie). Double-cliquez sur Connexion au rseau local. C. Lorsque lcran tat de la connexion au rseau local apparat, cliquez sur le bouton Proprits. D. Slectionnez Protocole Internet (TCP/IP) et cliquez sur le bouton Proprits. E. Slectionnez Obtenir une adresse IP automa-

tiquement et cliquez sur le bouton OK dans les crans suivants pour terminer la configuration du PC. F. Redmarrez lordinateur. C D E 38 39 tape 3 : configuration du routeur Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports C. Si votre fournisseur de services Internet le demande, entrez le nom dhte et le nom de domaine du routeur dans les champs appropris de longlet Setup (Configuration). Ces informations sont habituellement demandes par les fournisseurs de services Internet proposant un accs par cble. ltape 3, vous configurez le routeur pour lutiliser dans votre rseau et accder Internet par lintermdiaire de votre fournisseur de services Internet (ISP). Votre ISP peut imposer lemploi dun nom dhte et dun nom de domaine. Vous indiquerez aussi le type de confi-

guration WAN dans longlet Setup (Configuration) du routeur partir des informations fournies par votre ISP. Vous devrez demander ces informations de configuration votre ISP. Si vous ne disposez pas de ces informations, veuillez contacter votre ISP avant de conti-

nuer. Pour savoir quelles questions poser votre fournisseur de services Internet, reportez-

vous la question 1 de la section Aide. Les instructions de votre fournisseur de services Internet indiquent comment configurer votre PC pour un accs Internet. Comme vous utilisez maintenant le routeur pour partager un accs Internet entre plusieurs ordinateurs, vous aurez besoin de ces informations pour configurer le routeur. A. Ouvrez le navigateur Web. Il est normal dobtenir un message derreur ce stade. Continuez suivre ces instructions. Entrez 192.168.1.1 le champ Adresse de votre navigateur Web et appuyez sur la touche Entre. dans A B. Une fentre Mot de passe rseau, prsente la figure B1, apparat. (Les utilisateurs de Windows XP verront une fentre Connexion 192.168.1.1, prsente la figure B2). Laissez le champ Nom dutilisateur vide et entrez admin (le mot de passe par dfaut) en minuscules dans le champ Mot de passe. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton OK. B1 40 B2 D. Pour configurer le routeur pour votre rseau sans fil, vrifiez que les champs Wireless (Sans fil) de longlet Setup (Configuration)

(figure D) sont renseigns de la faon suivante :

Enable/Disable (Activer/Dsactiver)

: La slection de la case doption Enable (Activer) active la fonc-

tion sans fil du routeur. Les fonc-

tions sans fil ne sont disponibles que si elles sont actives. D SSID : Lidentificateur SSID (ou ESSID) est un nom unique attribu votre rseau sans fil. Il respecte la casse et ne doit pas comporter plus de 32 caractres. Lidentificateur SSID par dfaut est linksys , mais vous pouvez le remplacer par un nom de rseau sans fil personnel. Tous les points sans fil de votre rseau doivent utiliser le mme SSID. RReemmaarrqquuee ::si vous souhaitez changer les paramtres WEP du routeur, passez la section Configuration de la scurit sans fil. Channel (Canal) : Slectionnez le canal appropri pour votre rseau partir de la liste propose. Tous les points sans fil de votre rseau doivent utiliser le mme canal pour fonctionner correctement. E. Le routeur prend en charge cinq types de connexion : DHCP (obtention automatique dune adresse IP), PPPoE, Adresse IP permanente, RAS et PPTP. Ces types sont slec-

tionns dans le menu droulant en regard de WAN Connection Type (Type de con-

nexion WAN). Lcran Setup (Configuration) et les fonctions disponibles varient selon le type de connexion choisie. Les instructions correspondantes sont prsentes ici :

1. Obtain an IP Automatically (Obtenir une adresse IP automatiquement) Si votre fournisseur de services Internet indique que vous vous connectez par linterm-

diaire dune adresse IP dynamique (ou DHCP), procdez comme suit :

a. Slectionnez Obtain an IP automatically (Obtenir une adresse IP automatiquement) pour WAN Connection Type (Type de connexion WAN) (comme la figure D plus haut). b. Cliquez sur le bouton Apply (Appliquer) pour enregistrer les paramtres. 41 2. Adresse IP permanente Si votre fournisseur de services Internet indique que vous vous connectez par lintermdiaire dune adresse IP perma-

nente (ou statique), procdez comme suit :

a. Slectionnez Static IP (Adresse IP permanente) pour WAN Connection Type (Type de connexion WAN). b. Dans les champs situs en regard de Specify WAN IP Address

(Spcifier ladresse IP WAN), entrez ladresse IP. c. Renseignez le champ Subnet Mask

(Masque de sous-rseau). Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports 4. RAS RAS est un service utilis Singapour uniquement. Si vous utilisez une connexion RAS, demandez votre fournisseur de services Internet les informations de configuration nces-

saires. 5. PPTP PPTP est un service utilis en Europe uniquement. Si vous utilisez une con-

nexion PPTP, demandez votre four-

nisseur de services Internet les infor-

mations de configuration ncessaires. d. Renseignez le champ Default Gateway Address (Adresse de passerelle par dfaut). Entrez champs 1, 2 et/ou 3. Vous devez entrer au moins une adresse DNS. Cliquez sur le bouton Apply (Appliquer) pour enregistrer les paramtres. ladresse DNS dans E2 les e. f. 3. PPPoE Si votre fournisseur DSL indique que vous vous connectez par lintermdiaire de PPPoE ou si vous entrez normale-

ment un nom dutilisateur ainsi quun mot de passe pour accder Internet, procdez comme suit :

a. Slectionnez PPPoE pour WAN Connection Type (Type de con-

nexion WAN). b. Renseignez le champ User Name

(Nom dutilisateur). c. Renseignez le champ Password

(Mot de passe). d. Cliquez sur le bouton Apply

(Appliquer), pour enregistrer les paramtres. E3 e. Cliquez sur longlet Status (tat), puis sur le bouton Connect (Se connecter) pour lancer la con-

nexion. 42 E5 F. Si ce nest dj fait, cliquez sur le bouton Apply (Appliquer) pour enregistrer les paramtres. G. Remettez le modem cble ou DSL sous tension et redmarrez les ordinateurs. Ils utilisent prsent les nouveaux paramtres du routeur. Remarque : vous ne devez configurer le routeur que sur un seul ordinateur. Si vous avez besoin dinformations sur la configuration avance, visitez le site Web de support tech-

nique Linksys ladresse support.linksys.comou reportez-vous au Guide de lutilisa-

teur figurant sur le CD-ROM Setup Wizard (Assistant Installation). Flicitations ! La configuration du routeur est termine. Vous pouvez tester la configu-

ration en ouvrant votre navigateur Web partir dun ordinateur et en tapant www.linksys.com/registration. Si vous ne parvenez pas accder notre site Web, examinez nouveau les proc-

dures de cette section ou la section Aide de ce Guide de dmarrage rapide. 43 Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports Aide

La section Aide contient les questions les plus frquentes sur la connexion Internet. Si vous devez effectuer une configuration supplmentaire ou si vous souhaitez obtenir des informations sur les fonctions avances, visitez le site kb.linksys.comou consultez le Guide de lutilisateur, qui contient une annexe consacre au dpannage. Ce dernier est disponible sur le CD-ROM Setup Wizard (Assistant Configuration). 1. Je ne suis pas certain des informations que je dois me procurer auprs de mon fournisseur de services Internet (ISP) pour la mise en service de mon rseau. Quelles questions dois-je poser ?

Quel est mon type de connexion : adresse IP dynamique, adresse IP permanente ou PPPoE ?

Si jutilise une adresse IP dynamique, je dois demander :

Quel est mon nom dhte (ventuel) ?

Quel est mon nom de domaine (ventuel) ?

Si jutilise une adresse IP permanente, je dois demander :

Quelle est mon adresse IP ?

Quelle est ma passerelle ?

Quel est mon DNS ?

Si jutilise PPPoE (gnralement employ par les ISP DSL), je dois demander :

Quel est mon nom dutilisateur ?

Quel est mon mot de passe ?

Lorsque vous avez obtenu ces informations, suivez les instructions du Guide de dmarrage rapide - tape 3 : configuration du routeur et utilisez ces informations pour accder lon-

glet Setup (Configuration). Dans la section WAN Connection Type (Type de connexion WAN), reportez-vous au graphique de la page suivante :

Si vous avez ce type de connexion :

Adresse IP dynamique (DHCP) Adresse IP permanente Protocole PPPoE Procdez comme suit :

1. Slectionnez Obtain an IP automatically (Obtenir une adresse IP automatiquement) pour WAN Connection Type

(Type de connexion WAN). 2. Cliquez sur le bouton Apply (Appliquer) pour enregistrer les paramtres. 1. Slectionnez Static IP (Adresse IP permanente) pour WAN Connection Type (Type de connexion WAN). 2. Renseignez le champ IP Address (Adresse IP). 3. Renseignez le champ Subnet Mask (Masque de sous-

rseau). 4. Renseignez le champ Gateway Address (Adresse de passerelle). 5. Entrez ladresse DNS dans les champs 1, 2 et/ou 3. Vous devez entrer au moins une adresse DNS. 6. Cliquez sur le bouton Apply (Appliquer) pour enregistrer les paramtres. 1. Slectionnez PPPoE pour WAN Connection Type (Type de connexion WAN). 2. Renseignez le champ User Name (Nom dutilisateur). 3. Renseignez le champ Password (Mot de passe). 4. Cliquez sur le bouton Apply (Appliquer) pour enregistrer les paramtres. RAS ou protocole PPTP Si vous utilisez RAS (Singapore SingTel) ou le protocole PPTP

(service en Europe), demandez votre fournisseur de services Internet les informations de configuration ncessaires. 2. Je rencontre des problmes lors de la connexion Internet. Quels voyants doivent tre allums lavant du routeur ?

Le voyant de chaque routeur sallume pour toutes les connexions correctes tablies larrire du routeur, quil sagisse dun cble Ethernet ou dun cordon dalimentation. Par exemple, voici les voyants qui sallument en gnral lorsquun ordinateur et un modem cble ou DSL sont connects :

Lorsque le routeur est sous tension (ladaptateur secteur est branch sur le routeur), le voyant Powersallume. Lorsquun cble Ethernet est correctement raccord un PC et au port 4 du routeur, les voyants Link/Act, Ful/Colet 100de la colonne 4 sallument. Si une connexion par modem cble ou DSL est tablie, le voyant WAN Linksallume. 44 45 Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports

Mon voyant WAN Linknest pas allum. Que dois-je vrifier ?

Vrifiez que le cble qui relie le modem cble ou DSL et le routeur est identique celui fourni avec votre modem. Selon le type de connexion utilis par votre modem, il se peut que vous ayez besoin dun cble Ethernet droit ou crois (le type droit est plus courant).

Certains des voyants situs lavant du routeur ne sallument pas lorsque je le branche un PC.

Seul le voyant Link/Act doit sallumer pour quune connexion fonctionne cor-

rectement. 3. Je ne parviens accder ni Internet ni la page de configuration du routeur. Que dois-je vrifier ?

A. Vrifiez dabord que le modem cble ou DSL et les ordinateurs sont correctement con-

nects au routeur. Pour savoir comment vrifier les connexions, voir la question 2. B. Vrifiez ensuite que vous avez bien configur vos PC pour communiquer avec le rou-

teur. Vous trouverez ci-dessous des instructions destines aux diffrentes versions de Windows.

- Windows 95, 98 ou ME Dans le menu Dmarrer, cliquez sur Excuter. Lorsque la fentre Excuter appa-

rat, entrez winipcfg dans le champ Ouvrir, puis cliquez sur le bouton OK. Lorsque la fentre Configuration IP saffiche, cliquez sur la case grise munie dune flche noire vers le bas. Une liste de cartes saffiche. Slectionnez la carte que vous utilisez pour vous connecter Internet. Ces entres ne doivent pas contenir les termes PPP , VPN , AOL ou Dial-Up adapter . Le champ Adresse IP doit indiquer ladresse IP 192.168.1.100 ou 192.168.1.xxx, o xxx reprsente un nombre suprieur 100. Si votre adresse IP nest pas comprise dans cette plage, maintenez enfonc pendant plus de 30 secondes le bouton Reset (Rinitialisation) situ lavant du routeur. De cette manire, les valeurs par dfaut du routeur sont rtablies et vous devez redfinir sa page de configuration. Cette dernire opration effectue, redmarrez lordinateur.

- Windows NT, 2000 et XP Dans le menu Dmarrer, cliquez sur Excuter. Lorsque la fentre Excuter apparat, entrez cmd dans le champ Ouvrir, puis cliquez sur le bouton OK. Une invite de commande souvre. Entrez ipconfig /all, puis appuyez sur la touche Entre.

Le champ Adresse IP doit indiquer ladresse IP 192.168.1.100 ou 192.168.1.xxx, o xxx reprsente un nombre suprieur 100. Si votre adresse IP nest pas comprise dans cette plage, maintenez enfonc le bouton Reset (Rinitialisation) situ lavant du routeur pendant plus de 30 secondes. De cette manire, les valeurs par dfaut du routeur sont rtablies et vous devez reconfigurer sa page de configuration. Cette dernire opration effectue, redmarrez lordinateur. C. prsent, vous devez configurer certains paramtres dans Windows.

- Accdez votre bureau et double-cliquez sur Poste de travail, puis sur Panneau de configuration (pour les utilisateurs de Windows XP qui emploient linterface par dfaut, cliquez sur Dmarrer, puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration). Lorsque la fentre Panneau de configuration saffiche, double-cliquez sur licne Options Internet (les utilisateurs de Windows XP qui emploient linterface par dfaut doivent cliquer sur Connexions rseau et Internet, puis sur Options Internet). Lorsque la fentre Options Internet apparat, cliquez sur longlet Connexions.

- Activez la case cocher Ne jamais tablir de connexion (peu importe que cette option soit grise).

- Cliquez sur le bouton Paramtres LAN situ dans langle infrieur droit.

Lorsque la fentre Paramtres du rseau LAN apparat, dsactivez toutes les cases cocher.

- Cliquez sur le bouton OK, sur le bouton Appliquer (le bouton Appliquer est gris si vous navez modifi aucun paramtre), puis de nouveau sur le bouton OK.

- Quittez le Panneau de configuration et redmarrez votre ordinateur. 4. Lorsque je clique sur licne permettant daccder Internet et que jentre le nom dutilisateur ainsi que le mot de passe fournis par mon FAI, je ne parviens pas me connecter Internet. Quel est le problme ?

Cela signifie que vous utilisez le logiciel fourni par votre FAI. Utilisez Internet Explorer ou Netscape Navigator, qui se trouvent sur votre bureau (ou dans le menu Dmarrer de Windows XP). 5. Lorsque jutilise Internet Explorer, une bote de dialogue saffiche pour minviter tablir une connexion. Comment puis-je la dsactiver ?

A. Accdez votre bureau et double-cliquez sur Poste de travail, puis sur Panneau de configuration (les utilisateurs de Windows XP qui emploient linterface par dfaut doivent cliquer sur Dmarrer, puis slectionner Panneau de configuration). B. Lorsque la fentre Panneau de configuration saffiche, double-cliquez sur licne Options Internet (les utilisateurs de Windows XP qui emploient linterface par dfaut doivent cliquer sur Connexions rseau et Internet, puis sur Options Internet). C. Lorsque la fentre Options Internet apparat, cliquez sur longlet Connexions. 47 Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports D. Activez la case cocher Ne jamais tablir de connexion. E. Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer. F. Cliquez sur le bouton OK. 6. Je nobtiens aucune intensit de signal ni qualit de liaison. Que puis-je faire ?

A. Assurez-vous que le voyant WLAN du routeur est allum. B. Vrifiez que tous vos PC sans fil utilisent le mode Infrastructure . 7. Comment puis-je amliorer la porte du routeur ?

A. loignez au maximum le routeur du sol. B. Vrifiez quil nexiste aucune source importante de brouillage lectrique. (Par exemple :

des enceintes, des lampes fluorescentes, des micro-ondes, etc.) C. Modifiez le canal sans fil utilis. Pour ce faire :

Ouvrez votre navigateur Web et tapez http://192.168.1.1 dans le champ Adresse . Dans la zone Enter Network Password (Mot de passe rseau), laissez le champ User Name (Nom dutilisateur) vide et tapez admin comme mot de passe. Cliquez ensuite sur OK. Dans longlet Setup (Configuration), slectionnez le canal 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Apply (Appliquer) pour enregistrer les paramtres. Rptez cette procdure jusqu ce que vous trouviez le canal offrant la meilleure porte. xxx Configuration de la scurit sans fil Remarque : le cryptage WEP est une mesure de scurit des donnes supplmentaire, non essen-

tielle au fonctionnement du routeur. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) est une mthode de cryptage employe pour protger vos communications sans fil. WEP utilise une combinaison de cls 64 bits ou 128 bits pour mettre en uvre un contrle daccs votre rseau et des fonctions de scurit par cryptage pour chaque transmission de donnes. Pour dcoder une transmission de don-

nes, chaque point du rseau doit utiliser une cl 64 bits ou 128 bits identique. Des niveaux de cryptage levs augmentent le niveau de scurit, mais, en raison de leur complexit, peuvent entraner une diminution des performances du rseau. Le terme 40 bits dsigne parfois le cryptage WEP. Il correspond simplement au cryptage WEP 64 bits. Ce niveau de cryptage WEP est qualifi de cryptage 40 bits parce quil utilise une cl secrte 40 bits avec un vecteur dinitialisation 24 bits (40 + 24

= 64). Les fournisseurs sans fil utilisent indiffremment ces deux noms. Linksys utilise le terme 64 bits pour dsigner ce niveau de cryptage. Vrifiez le fonctionnement de votre rseau sans fil avant de tenter de configurer le cryptage WEP. Un rseau sans fil cryptage WEP 128 bits NE PEUT PAS communiquer avec un rseau sans fil cryptage WEP 64 bits. Par consquent, vrifiez que tous vos disposi-

tifs sans fil utilisent le mme niveau de cryptage. Tous les dispositifs sans fil con-

formes la norme 802.11b prennent en charge le cryptage WEP 64 bits. Outre lactivation du cryptage WEP, Linksys recommande galement la mise en uvre des mesures de scurit suivantes :

Changement du SSID par dfaut linksys

Changement rgulier de la cl WEP Remarque : pour activer le cryptage WEP, vous devez dabord activer les fonc-

tions sans fil. Slectionnez Enable (Activer) dans longlet Wireless (Sans fil) du routeur avant de continuer. 48 49 Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports La procdure suivante indique comment utiliser le cryptage WEP 1. Dans longlet Setup (Configuration) de lutilitaire Web, slectionnez Mandatory

(Obligatoire) dans la section WEP. 2. Cliquez sur le bouton WEP Key Setting (Paramtre de cl WEP) pour dfinir le type et le niveau de cryptage WEP. 3. Lcran affich la figure C-1 peut apparatre pour vri-

fier que vous activez le cryptage WEP. Cliquez sur le bou-

ton OK pour contin-

uer. Figure C-1 4. Lcran prsent la figure C-2 apparat. Vous pouvez y choisir les paramtres de cryptage WEP.

WEP (64 Bit or 128 B) (WEP 64 bits ou 128 bits) Slectionnez le niveau de cryptage dans la zone de liste droulante. Le cryptage WEP 128bits est propre Linksys et peut crer des conflits avec le cryptage WEP dautres fournisseurs. Remarque : pour utiliser le cryptage WEP, tous les points du rseau sans fil doivent activer le cryptage WEP et tre configurs avec les mmes paramtres de cl. La cl de cryptage WEP est gnre de lune des deux manires suivantes :

1. Vous pouvez crer une cl de cryptage en utilisant une phrase de passe

(Passphrase). a. Renseignez le champ Passphrase (mot de passe dfini par lutilisateur). Cette phrase peut comporter jusqu 31 lettres, symboles et chiffres. Les espaces sont interdits. b. Cliquez sur le bouton Generate (Gnrer) pour crer une cl. La cl comportera 10 chiffres si vous choisissez un cryptage 64 bits ou 26 chiffres si vous choisis-

sez un cryptage 128 bits. Cette cl sera utilise pour crypter et dcrypter les don-

nes changes entre le routeur et les PC sans fil de votre rseau. Le champ Key (Cl) naffiche pas ncessairement tous les chiffres. Cliquez dans le champ Key (Cl). Dplacez le curseur vers la droite pour afficher le reste de la cl. Notez toute la cl EXACTEMENT telle quelle apparat. 2. Vous pouvez entrer la cl de cryptage manuellement. Notez la phrase de passe ou la cl manuelle. Vous aurez besoin de ces informations pour les autres dispositifs sans fil sur le rseau, puisque la mme cl de cryptage WEP doit tre entre sur tous les priphriques sans fil sur le rseau. Une fois que vous avez choisi la mthode de cryptage de cl et entr la phrase de passe ou la cl manuelle, cliquez sur le bouton Apply (Appliquer) pour mettre fin la partie cryptage de la configuration. Remarque : dans Windows XP, une cl 128 bits gnre par le routeur sera qualifie de cl 104 bits (26 chiffres) et une cl 64 bits gnre par le routeur de cl 40 bits (10 chiffres) . Figure C-2 50 51 Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports Configuration de la scurit sans fil dans Windows XP Windows XP ne permettant pas lutilisation de la fonction phrase de passe Linksys avec les adaptateurs PC sans fil, vous devez entrer manuellement la cl gnre dans la section prcdente. Les instructions suivantes indiquent comment activer le cryptage WEP et entrer la cl de cryptage manuellement pour vos cartes PC sans fil afin de permettre au systme Windows XP dtablir une communication sans fil avec le routeur. Ces instructions partent du principe que votre lecteur de CD-ROM correspond la let-

tre dunit D et que vous utilisez Windows XP dans le mode par dfaut. Vrifiez que la cl WEP est gnre par le routeur. 1. Dans le menu Dmarrer, choisissez Panneau de configuration (figure C-3). 2. Dans la fentre Panneau de configuration , cliquez sur licne Connexions rseau et Internet (figure C-4). 3. Cliquez sur licne Connexions rseau (figure C-5). Figure C-4 Figure C-3 Figure C-5 4. La fentre Connexions rseau apparat (figure C-6). Sous Rseau local ou Internet haute vitesse sont rpertories toutes les cartes rseau installes et util-

ises dans votre ordinateur. Double-cliquez sur licne Connexion rseau sans fil associe votre adaptateur sans fil. Si la fentre tat de la connexion du rseau sans fil apparat, passez ltape suivante. 52 53 Instant Wireless Series Routeur de point daccs sans fil avec commutateur 4 ports Si une fentre Connexion un rseau sans fil apparat, dans la section Rseaux disponibles, cliquez sur le rseau sans fil concern, spcifi par le SSID du routeur. Double-cliquez ensuite sur licne Connexion rseau sans fil. 6. Lorsque la fentre tat de la connexion du rseau sans fil apparat (figure C-8), cliquez sur longlet Configuration rseaux sans fil. 5. Lorsque la fentre tat de la connexion du rseau sans fil apparat (figure C-7), cliquez sur le bouton Proprits. Figure C-6 Figure C-8 7. Si le rseau sans fil appro-

pri, spcifi par le SSID du routeur, est affich dans la section Rseaux favoris

(figure C-9), double-cliquez dessus et passez ltape suivante. Sinon, cliquez sur le rseau sans fil appropri, spcifi par le SSID du routeur, dans la section Rseaux disponibles . Cliquez ensuite sur le bou-

ton Configurer. Figure C-7 54 Figure C-9 55 Instant Wireless Series 8. La fentre Proprits du rseau sans fil (figure C-10) apparat. Activez la case cocher Cryptage de donnes (WEP activ). Dsactivez les cases cocher Authentification rseau (mode partag) et La cl mest fournie automatiquement. Dans le champ Cl rseau , entrez la cl exacte (tous les 10 ou 26 chiffres, selon le niveau de cryptage) gnre par le routeur. Vrifiez que le champ Format de la cl contient Chiffres hexadcimaux et que le champ Longueur de la cl contient 40 bits (10 chiffres) ou 104 bits

(26 chiffres) . Si tel nest pas le cas, vous navez pas entr la cl correctement. Figure C-10 Cliquez sur le bouton OK pour enregistrer les paramtres. Cliquez sur les boutons OK jusqu ce que vous reveniez la fentre tat de la connexion rseau sans fil . Fermez toutes les fentres pour revenir au bureau de Windows XP. Fermez toutes les applications et redmarrez le PC. Aprs le redmarrage, la configuration WEP est termine et vous devriez pouvoir tablir une connexion sans fil au routeur. 56 57 COPYRIGHT UND MARKEN Copyright 2002 Linksys. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Instant Wireless ist eine Marke von Linksys. Microsoft, Windows und das Windows-Logo sind eingetragene Marken der Microsoft Corporation. Alle anderen Marken und Markennamen sind Eigentum der jeweiligen Firmen. FCC-KONFORMITTSERKLRUNG Der Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch wurde nach Magabe der Grenzwerte von Abschnitt 15 der FCC-

Vorschriften geprft und als digitales Gert der Klasse B eingestuft. Zweck dieser Grenzwerte ist es, fr angemessenen Schutz vor schdlichen Strungen im Umfeld einer Privatinstallation zu sorgen. Dieses Gert erzeugt und verwendet Funkfrequenzenergie und kann diese ausstrahlen. Bei unsachgemer Installation und Verwendung kann es Strungen des Funkverkehrs verursachen. Es kann nicht grundstzlich ausgeschlossen werden, dass in bestimmten Installationen Strungen auftreten. Fr den Fall, dass das Gert Strungen des Funk- oder Fernsehempfangs auslst, die sich durch Aus- und Einschalten des Gerts feststellen lassen, wird dem Benutzer empfohlen, die Strung durch eine oder mehrere der folgenden Manahmen zu beseitigen:

Antenne neu ausrichten oder an einem anderen Ort aufstellen

Abstand zum Empfnger oder Gert erhhen

Empfnger und Gert an getrennten Stromkreisen anschlieen

Hndler oder erfahrenen Radio/TV-Fachmann hinzuziehen Inhaltsverzeichnis Einfhrung Schritt 1: Anschlieen des Routers Schritt 2: Konfigurieren der PCs Schritt 3: Konfigurieren des Routers Hilfe Konfigurieren der Wireless-Sicherheit 61 62 64 68 72 77 Konfigurieren der Wireless-Sicherheit unter Windows XP 80 Produktuntersttzung erhalten Sie unter den folgenden Adressen:

E-mail Web europe-support@linksys.com latam-soporte@linksys.com http://www.linksys.com/international 58 59 Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch Einfhrung Vielen Dank fr die Wahl des Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point-Routers. Dieser Router ermglicht Ihnen die Einrichtung eines Netzwerks mit Ihren PCs sowie die Freigabe Ihrer Internet-Verbindung im Netzwerk. Wie kann der Router diese Funktionen erfllen? Wenn Sie Ihr Kabel- oder DSL-Modem direkt mit dem Router verbinden und Ihre PCs an den Ethernet-Ports des Routers anschlieen, ist die Wirkung dieselbe, als wre jeder PC direkt mit dem Internet verbunden. Auf diese Weise knnen mehrere PCs gleichzeitig eine Internet-Verbindung verwenden. Da der Router zugleich ein Access Point ist, kann er Ihr Ethernet-Netzwerk mit Ihren kabellosen PCs als Bridge verbinden. Was bedeutet das?

Netzwerke sind ein wirkungsvolles Mittel zur gemeinsamen Nutzung von Computerressourcen. ber Netzwerke knnen Sie beispielsweise von verschiedenen Computern aus auf einen Drucker zugreifen und mit Daten arbeiten, die sich auf der Festplatte eines anderen Computers befinden. Netzwerke werden sogar dazu verwendet, Videospiele mit mehreren Spielern zu ermglichen. Sie sind also nicht nur fr die Arbeit zuhause und im Bro, sondern auch fr die Freizeit ntzlich. Die PCs, die Sie an die vier LAN-Ports des Routers anschlieen, bilden bei richtiger Konfiguration ein so genanntes LAN (Local Area Network), d. h. ein Nahbereichsnetzwerk. Sie sind ber Ethernet-Kabel verbunden, die jeweils an den Ethernet-Karten der Computer und an den von 1 bis 4 nummerierten LAN-Ports des Routers angeschlossen sind. Der Begriff Ethernet, mit dem Netzwerkkomponenten wie Kabel und Netzwerkkarten be-

zeichnet werden, weist darauf hin, dass Ethernet der Typ des Netzwerks ist, das Sie einrichten. In der Dokumentation des Routers bezeichnet Ethernet alle Netzwerkkomponenten, die Computerdaten mit 10 bis 100 Mbit/s bertragen. (10 und 100 Mbit/s sind die von den Netzwerkgerten verwendeten bertragungsraten. Wenn Daten mit 10 Mbit/s bertragen werden, entspricht dies dem Inhalt von mehr als sieben Disketten pro Sekunde!

Netzwerkkomponenten, die mit 100 Mbit/s arbeiten, transportieren die Daten sogar noch zehnmal schneller!) PCs knnen mit dem Router auch kabellos kommunizieren. Wenn Sie Ihre kabellosen PCs und den Router mit denselben Wireless-Einstellungen konfigurieren, knnen Sie diese kabellosen PCs in Ihr vorhandenes Ethernet-Netzwerk einbinden. Ein besonders interessanter Aspekt ist, dass der Router die gemeinsame Nutzung Ihrer Kabel- oder DSL-Internetverbindung ermglicht. Hierzu mssen Sie lediglich Ihr Kabel- oder DSL-Modem ber ein Ethernet-Kabel an den WAN-Port des Routers anschlieen. (WAN ist die Abkrzung von Wide Area Network, d. h. Weitbereichsnetzwerk.) Das Internet weist als globales Netzwerk die grte Ausdehnung aller Netzwerke auf! Die an den Router angeschlossenen PCs knnen diese Verbindung nutzen. 60 Die Anweisungen in dieser Kurzanleitung helfen Ihnen, den Router anzuschlieen, Ihre PCs zu konfigurieren und den Router in Ihrem Netzwerk einzurichten. Diese Anweisungen sollten ausreichen, um ein einfaches Netzwerk mit freigegebenem Internetzugriff in Betrieb zu nehmen. Der Router verfgt auch ber erweiterte Funktionen, die jedoch ein entsprechendes Fachwissen ber Router und Netzwerke voraussetzen. Diese und andere Themen werden im Benutzerhandbuch behandelt, das sich auf der CD des Setup-Assistenten befindet. So sieht die fertig gestellte Struktur aus:

Das Setup des Routers ist dem in der oben ste-

henden Abbildung fr Windows-PCs gezeigten Setup vergleichbar. Mit dem Router knnen Sie Ihre Kabel- oder DSL-Verbindung fr mehrere Computer in Ihrem privaten oder geschftlichen Umfeld freigeben. Eine solche Struktur wird LAN (Local Area Network) genannt. Diese Kurzanleitung vermittelt eine bersicht der Komponenten zur Einrichtung eines ein-

fachen privaten oder geschftlichen Netzwerks. In den nchsten drei Abschnitten erfahren Sie, wie Sie Ihre Gerte einrichten und konfigurieren mssen, um ber einen gemeinsamen Hochgeschwindigkeitszugang zum Internet zu verfgen. Schritt 1: Anschlieen des Routers In diesem Schritt schlieen Sie den Router an Ihr Kabel- oder DSL-Modem an. Anschlieend verbinden Sie Ihre PCs mit dem Router. Schritt 2: Konfigurieren der PCs Hier ist beschrieben, wie Sie Ihre PCs konfigurieren mssen, um mit dem Router zu kommu-

nizieren. Schritt 3: Konfigurieren des Routers In diesem Schritt lernen Sie grundlegende Einstellungen des Routers kennen, die den Betrieb mit Ihrem Kabel- oder DSL-Modem und Ihren ISP-Einstellungen ermglichen. HHiinnwweeiiss:: Diese Kurzanleitung beschreibt die Einrichtung des Routers mit Ethernet-

Kabeln. Der Router kann zwar auch ber eine kabellose Verbindung eingerichtet wer-

den. In dieser Kurzanleitung werden jedoch keine Details zur kabellosen Einrichtung des Routers beschrieben. Wenn Sie den Router ber eine kabellose Verbindung einrichten mchten, finden Sie weitere Informationen auf der Linksys-Website unter www.linksys.com. 61 Schritt 1: Anschlieen des Routers B. Verbinden Sie mit einem Ethernet-Kabel den LAN- bzw. Ethernet-Port des Kabel- oder DSL-Modems mit dem WAN-Port des Routers. Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch In Schritt 1 verbinden Sie den Router mit Ihrem Kabel- oder DSL-Modem und Ihren priva-

ten oder geschftlichen Computern. Vergewissern Sie sich zunchst, dass alle Gerte ausgeschaltet sind, mit denen Sie arbei-

ten werden, also die PCs, das Modem und der Router. A. Soweit Sie dies nicht bereits durchgefhrt haben, schlieen Sie jetzt Ihr Kabel- oder DSL-Modem richtig an. Fr den Kabelbetrieb ist eine Koaxialbuchse (Abbildung A1) und fr den DSL-Betrieb eine Telefonbuchse vorgesehen (Abbildung A2). (Folgen Sie den Anweisungen im Installationshandbuch Ihres Kabel- oder DSL-Modems.) B C. Schlieen Sie ein Ethernet-Kabel an die Ethernet-Karte Ihres PCs an. Schlieen Sie das andere Ende des Kabels an einen LAN-

Port des Routers an. Wiederholen Sie diesen Vorgang fr jeden weiteren PC, den Sie an den Router anschlieen mchten. C1 Hinweis: Ist die Ethernet-Karte Ihres PCs nicht eingerichtet, Informationen in der Dokumentation der Ethernet-Karte. finden Sie weitere Um die Installation zu vereinfachen, beginnen Sie mit dem LAN-Port 1 des Routers. Schlieen Sie anschlieend Port 2, Port 3 und schlielich Port 4 an. Wenn Sie mehr als vier PCs an den Router anschlieen mchten, mssen Sie an den Uplink-Port des Routers einen Hub oder Switch anschlieen (wenn Sie den Uplink-

Port verwenden, ist Port 4 nicht verfgbar). Weitere zum Uplink-

Verfahren finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch auf der CD des Setup-Assistenten. Informationen C2 D. Verbinden Sie das Netzgert mit dem Stromversorgungsanschluss des Routers. Schlieen Sie das Netzgert an einer Netzsteckdose an. Schalten Sie das Kabel- oder DSL-Modem ein. Schalten Sie dann den ersten PC ein, den Sie zum Konfigurieren des Routers verwenden mchten. Fahren Sie mit Schritt 2 fort: Konfigurieren Sie die PCs (siehe nchste Seite). 63 A1 62 A2 Schritt 2: Konfigurieren der PCs Betriebssystem:

Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch In Schritt 2 werden Sie die einzelnen Computer fr die Kommunikation mit dem Router kon-

figurieren. Hierzu mssen Sie die Netzwerkeinstellungen Ihres PCs so einstellen, dass eine IP-Adresse

(auch TCP/IP-Adresse genannt) automatisch bezogen wird. Computer verwenden IP-

Adressen zur gegenseitigen Kommunikation ber ein Netzwerk oder das Internet. Ermitteln Sie, unter welchem Betriebssystem Ihr Computer luft, z. B. unter Windows 95, 98, Millennium, 2000 oder XP. Sie mssen den Typ des verwendeten Betriebssystems kennen, um fortzufahren. Hierzu knnen Sie auf die Schaltflche Start klicken und anschlieend die Option Einstellungen auswhlen. (Wenn Ihr Startmen die Option Einstellungen nicht enthlt, handelt es sich um Windows XP. Hier knnen Sie die Systemsteuerung direkt aus dem Startmen whlen.) Doppelklicken Sie dann auf Systemsteuerung, und klicken Sie auf das Symbol System. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Abbrechen, wenn Sie fertig sind. Nachdem Sie jetzt wissen, welches Windows-Betriebssystem Sie verwenden, folgen Sie in diesem Schritt den Anweisungen fr das Betriebssystem Ihres Computers. Diesen Vorgang mssen Sie gegebenenfalls fr jeden Computer wiederholen, den Sie mit dem Router verbinden. Auf den nchsten Seiten erfahren Sie Schritt fr Schritt, wie Sie Ihre TCP/IP-Einstellungen fr das verwendete Windows-Betriebssystem konfigurieren. Nachdem Sie die Konfiguration Ihrer Computer abgeschlossen haben, fahren Sie mit Schritt 3 fort: Konfigurieren des Routers A. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Start, klicken Sie auf Einstellungen, und ffnen Sie die Systemsteuerung. Doppelklicken Sie hier auf das Symbol Netzwerk, um das Fenster Netzwerk zu ffnen. B. Whlen Sie die Registerkarte Konfiguration aus, und markieren Sie Zeile TCP/IP fr die entsprechende Ethernet-Karte*. Wenn das Wort TCP/IP separat angezeigt wird, whlen Sie diese Zeile aus**. Klicken Sie anschlieend auf die Schaltflche Eigenschaften. C. Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte IP-Adresse, und whlen Sie die Option IP-Adresse automatisch beziehen. D. Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte Gateway, und vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Feld Installierte Gateways leer ist. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche OK. B E. Klicken Sie erneut auf die Schaltflche OK. Mglicherweise werden Sie nun vom System nach den Original-Installationsdateien von Windows oder nach zustzlichen Dateien gefragt. Geben Sie den richtigen Dateipfad fr diese Ressourcen an, z. B. D:\win98, D:\win9x, C:\Windows\Options\cabs usw. (hierbei wird angenommen, dass D der Laufwerkbuchstabe Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks ist). C F. Wenn Sie vom System gefragt werden, ob Sie Ihren PC neu starten mchten, klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Ja. Fhren Sie den Neustart in jedem Fall durch, auch wenn Sie hierzu nicht aufgefordert werden.

*Hinweis: Whlen Sie keinen TCP/IP-Eintrag, dessen Name die Zeichenfolgen DUN, PPPoE, VPN oder AOL enthlt.

**Hinweis: Ist keine TCP/IP-Zeile aufgelistet, sehen Sie im Benutzerhandbuch auf der Setup-CD des Assistenten oder in der Dokumentation Ihrer Ethernet-Karte nach, wie Sie TCP/IP jetzt installieren. 64 65 Betriebssystem:

Windows 2000 A. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Start, klicken Sie auf Einstellungen, und ffnen Sie die System-steuerung. Doppelklicken Sie hier auf DF-

das Verbindungen. Hierdurch wird das Fenster Netzwerk geffnet. Netzwerk-

Symbol und B. Whlen Sie das Symbol LAN-Verbindung fr die entsprechende Ethernet-Karte* aus (in der Regel ist dies die erste aufgelistete LAN-Verbindung). Doppelklicken Sie auf LAN-Verbindung. C. Wenn das Statusfenster fr die LAN-Verbindung angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Eigenschaften. D. Whlen Sie Internetprotokoll (TCP/IP), und kli-

*Hinweis: Whlen Sie keinen TCP/IP-Eintrag, dessen Name die Zeichenfolgen DUN, PPPoE, VPN oder AOL enthlt. C D E Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch Betriebssystem:

Windows XP Die folgenden Anweisungen setzen voraus, dass Sie die Standardoberflche von Windows XP verwen-

den. Wenn Sie die klassische Oberflche verwenden

(bei der die Symbole und Mens wie in den vorheri-

gen Windows-Versionen aussehen), folgen Sie den Anweisungen fr Windows 2000. A. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Start, ffnen Sie die Systemsteuerung, und klicken Sie auf und das Internetverbindungen. Klicken Sie dann auf das Symbol Netzwerkverbindungen, um das Fenster Netzwerk zu ffnen. Netzwerk-

Symbol B. Whlen Sie das Symbol LAN-Verbindung fr die entsprechende Ethernet-Karte aus (in der Regel ist dies die erste aufgelistete LAN-

Verbindung). Doppelklicken Sie auf LAN-

Verbindung. C. Wenn das Statusfenster fr die LAN-Verbindung angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Eigenschaften. D. Whlen Sie Internetprotokoll (TCP/IP), und kli-

cken Sie auf die Schaltflche Eigenschaften. E. Whlen Sie IP-Adresse automatisch beziehen, und klicken Sie in den folgenden Dialogfeldern auf die Schaltflche OK, um die Konfiguration des PCs abzuschlieen. F. Starten Sie Ihren Computer neu. C D E 66 67 Schritt 3: Konfigurieren des Routers C. Sofern dies von Ihrem ISP vorgeschrieben wird, geben Sie den Hostnamen und den Domnennamen des Routers in den entsprechenden Feldern Host Name und Domain Name der Registerkarte Setup ein (dies ist blicherweise bei Kabel-ISPs der Fall). Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch In Schritt 3 konfigurieren Sie den Router fr Ihr Netzwerk und richten den Internetzugang ber Ihren Internetdienstanbieter (ISP) ein. Ihr ISP schreibt mglicherweise die Verwendung eines Hostnamens und eines Domnennamens vor. Auerdem legen Sie den WAN-

Konfigurationstyp auf der Registerkarte Setup des Routers nach den Setup-Informationen Ihres ISP fest. Diese Setup-Informationen mssen Ihnen vorliegen.Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, wenden Sie sich an Ihren ISP, bevor Sie fortfahren. Die richtigen Fragestellungen an Ihren ISP finden Sie in Frage Nr. 1 im Hilfeabschnitt. Die Anweisungen Ihres ISP beschreiben, wie Sie Ihren PC fr den Internetzugriff einrichten. Da Sie jetzt den Router zur gemeinsamen Nutzung des Internetzugangs durch mehrere Computer verwenden, werden diese Setup-Informationen fr die Router-Konfiguration bentigt. A. ffnen Sie Ihren Webbrowser. (Wenn Sie an diesem Punkt eine Fehlermeldung erhalten, knnen Sie diese ignorieren. Fahren Sie den Anweisungen entsprechend fort.) Geben Sie im Adressfeld des Web-

browsers 192.168.1.1 ein, und drcken Sie die EINGABETASTE. B. Nun wird ein Fenster zur Eingabe A des Netzwerkkennworts angezeigt (siehe Abbildung B1). Unter Windows XP wird das Fenster Verbinden mit 192.168.1.1 angezeigt (siehe Abbildung B2.). Lassen Sie das Feld Benutzername leer, und geben Sie im Feld Kennwort das Standardkennwort admin in Kleinbuchstaben ein. Klicken Sie anschlieend auf die Schaltflche OK. B1 68 B2 D. Um den Router fr Ihr kabelloses Netzwerk zu konfigurieren, verge-

wissern Sie sich, dass die Wireless-Felder auf der Regis-

terkarte Setup (siehe Abbildung D) wie folgt ausgefllt sind:

E n a b l e / D i s a b l e

(Aktivieren/Deaktivieren):

Durch Auswahl des Optionsfelds Enable

(Aktivieren) werden die Wireless-

Funktionen des Routers aktiviert. Die Wireless-Funktionen sind nur nach Aktivierung verfgbar. D SSID: Die SSID (bzw. ESSID) ist ein eindeutiger Name fr Ihr kabel-

loses Netzwerk. Er darf maximal 32 Zeichen umfassen; die Gro-/Kleinschreibung wird bercksichtigt. Die Standard-

SSID lautet linksys. Sie sollten diese jedoch auf einen persnlichen Netzwerknamen ndern. Alle Wireless Access Points in Ihrem Netzwerk mssen dieselbe SSID verwen-

den. Channel

(Kanal): Whlen Sie den entsprechenden Kanal fr Ihr Netzwerk aus der angezeigten Liste. Alle Wireless Access Points in Ihrem Netzwerk mssen denselben Kanal verwenden, um einwandfrei zu funktionieren. HHiinnwweeiiss:: Wenn Sie die WEP-Einstellungen des Routers ndern mchten, fahren Sie mit dem Abschnitt zum Konfigurieren der Wireless-Sicherheit fort. E. Der Router untersttzt fnf Verbindungstypen: DHCP (automatischer Bezug der IP-

Adresse), PPPoE, statische IP-Adresse, RAS und PPTP. Diese Typen knnen aus dem Pulldownmen neben WAN Connection Type (WAN-Verbindungstyp) ausgewhlt wer-

den. Abhngig von Ihrer Auswahl des Verbindungstyps wird ein entsprechender Setup-

Bildschirm mit spezifischen Funktionen angezeigt. Die Anweisungen hierzu finden Sie nachfolgend:

1. Obtain an IP Automatically (IP-Adresse automatisch beziehen) Wenn Ihr ISP vorschreibt, dass Sie eine Verbindung ber eine dynamische IP-Adresse (oder DHCP) herstellen sollen, fhren Sie diese Schritte aus:

a. Whlen Sie fr den WAN-Verbindungstyp die Option Obtain an IP automatically (IP-

Adresse automatisch beziehen), wie zuvor in Abbildung D gezeigt. b. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Apply (bernehmen) um die Einstellungen zu speich-

ern. 69 Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch 4. RAS RAS ist ein Dienst, der nur in Singapur verwendet wird. Wenn Sie eine RAS-Verbindung ver-

wenden, fragen Sie Ihren ISP nach den erforderlichen Setup-Informationen. 5. PPTP PPTP ist ein Dienst, der nur in Europa verwendet wird. Wenn Sie eine PPTP-

Verbindung verwenden, fragen Sie Ihren ISP nach den erforderlichen Setup-Informationen. 2. Statische IP-Adresse Wenn Ihr ISP vorschreibt, dass Sie eine Verbindung ber eine statische

(unvernderliche) IP-Adresse herstellen sollen, fhren Sie diese Schritte aus:

a. Whlen Sie als WAN-Verbin-

dungstyp die Option Static IP

(statische IP-Adresse). Geben Sie in den Feldern neben Specify WAN IP Address

(IP-

Adresse angeben) die IP-Adresse ein. c. Geben Sie unter Subnet Mask die b. Subnetmask ein. d. Geben Sie unter Default Gateway Address die Standard-Gateway-

adresse ein. e. Geben Sie unter DNS die DNS-

Adresse in den Feldern 1, 2 bzw. 3 ein. Sie mssen mindestens eine DNS-Adresse eingeben. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Apply (bernehmen) um die Einstellungen zu speichern. E2 f. 3. PPPoE Wenn Ihr DSL-Anbieter vorschreibt, dass Sie eine Verbindung ber PPPoE herstellen, oder wenn Sie blicher-

weise einen Benutzernamen und ein Kennwort eingeben, um auf das Internet zuzugreifen, fhren Sie diese Schritte aus:

a. Whlen Sie als WAN-Verbin-

dungstyp die Option PPPoE. b. Geben Sie unter User Name den Benutzernamen ein. c. Geben Sie unter Password das Kennwort ein. d. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Apply (bernehmen) um die Einstellungen zu speichern. e. Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte E3 Status und anschlieend auf die Schaltflche Connect (Verbinden), um die Verbindung herzustellen. E5 F. Soweit Sie dies nicht bereits durchgefhrt haben, klicken Sie jetzt auf die Schaltflche Apply (bernehmen) um die Einstellungen zu speichern. G. Schalten Sie das Kabel- oder DSL-Modem aus und wieder ein, und starten Sie Ihre Computer neu. Damit bernehmen diese Gerte jetzt die neuen Einstellungen des Routers. Hinweis: Der Router muss nur von einem Computer aus konfiguriert werden. Erweiterte Setup-Informationen finden Sie auf der Support-Website von Linksys unter support.linksys.comoder im Benutzerhandbuch auf der CD des Setup-Assistenten. Das Setup ist beendet! Der Router ist nun vollstndig konfiguriert. Sie knnen das Setup testen, indem Sie Ihren Webbrowser auf einem der Computer ffnen und www.linksys.com/registrationeingeben. Wenn Sie diese Website nicht ffnen knnen, sollten Sie die einzelnen Schritte in diesem Abschnitt noch einmal berprfen oder im Hilfeabschnitt dieser Kurzanleitung nachschlagen. 70 71 Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch Verbindungstyp:

Fhren Sie diese Schritte aus:

Hilfe

Im Hilfeabschnitt finden Sie die am hufigsten gestellten Fragen zu Internetverbindungen. Wenn Sie zustzliche Optionen festlegen mchten oder Informationen zu den erweiterten Funktionen bentigen, besuchen Sie kb.linksys.com, oder schlagen Sie im Benutzerhandbuch nach, das einen Anhang zur Fehlerbehebung enthlt (es befindet sich auf der CD des Setup-Assistenten). 1. Ich bin mir nicht sicher, welche ich von meinem Internetdienstanbieter (ISP) bentige, um mein Netzwerk in Betrieb nehmen zu knnen. Welche Fragen muss ich stellen?

Informationen Welchen Verbindungstyp verwenden Sie: dynamische IP-Adresse, statische IP-Adresse oder PPPoE?

Wenn Sie eine dynamische IP-Adresse verwenden, bentigen Sie folgende Daten:

Ihren Hostnamen (soweit erforderlich) Ihren Domnennamen (soweit erforderlich)

Wenn Sie eine statische IP-Adresse verwenden, bentigen Sie folgende Daten:

Ihre IP-Adresse Ihre Gateway-Adresse Ihre DNS-Adresse

Wenn Sie PPPoE verwenden (blich bei DSL-ISPs), bentigen Sie folgende Daten:

Ihren Benutzernamen Ihr Kennwort Nachdem Sie diese Informationen erhalten haben, folgen Sie den Anweisungen in Schritt 3 der Kurzanleitung: Konfigurieren Sie den Router, und verwenden Sie diese Informationen zur Eingabe auf der Registerkarte Setup. Beziehen Sie sich fr den Abschnitt WAN Connection Type (WAN-Verbindungstyp) auf das Diagramm auf der nchsten Seite:

Dynamische IP-Adresse (DHCP) Statische IP-Adresse 1. Whlen Sie als WAN-Verbindungstyp die Option Obtain an IP automatically (IP-Adresse automatisch beziehen). 2. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Apply (bernehmen) um die Einstellung zu speichern. 1. Whlen Sie als WAN-Verbindungstyp die Option Static IP

(statische IP-Adresse). 2. Geben Sie unter IP Address die IP-Adresse ein. 3. Geben Sie unter Subnet Mask die Subnetmask ein. 4. Geben Sie unter Gateway Address die Gatewayadresse ein. 5. Geben Sie unter DNS die DNS-Adresse in den Feldern 1, 2 bzw. 3 ein. Sie mssen mindestens eine DNS-Adresse eingeben. 6. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Apply (bernehmen) um die PPPoE Einstellungen zu speichern. 1. Whlen Sie als WAN-Verbindungstyp die Option PPPoE. 2. Geben Sie unter User Name den Benutzernamen ein. 3. Geben Sie unter Password das Kennwort ein. 4. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflchen Apply (bernehmen) um die Einstellungen zu speichern. RAS oder PPTP Wenn Sie RAS (Singapore SingTel) oder PPTP (einen europischen Dienst) verwenden, fragen Sie Ihren ISP nach den erforderlichen Setup-Informationen. 2.

Ich habe Probleme beim Herstellen einer Verbindung zum Internet. Welche der LEDs an der Vorderseite des Routers sollen leuchten?

Eine leuchtende Router-LED zeigt jeweils an, dass die zugehrige Verbindung an der Rckseite des Routers einwandfrei ist, gleich ob es sich dabei um das Ethernet-Kabel oder um die Stromversorgung handelt. Beispielsweise leuchten blicherweise die folgenden LEDs, nachdem ein Computer und ein Kabel- oder DSL-Modem angeschlossen wurde:

- Wenn der Router eingeschaltet ist (wenn also das Netzteil am Router angeschlossen ist), leuchtet die LED Power.

- Wenn ein Ethernet-Kabel an Port 4 des Routers und an einen PC richtig

angeschlossen ist, leuchten die LEDs Link/Act, Ful/Colund 100in Spalte 4. Der Anschluss eines Kabel- oder DSL-Modems bewirkt das Aufleuchten der LED WAN Link. 72 73 Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch

Die LED WAN Linkleuchtet nicht. Was muss ich berprfen?

Prfen Sie, ob es sich bei dem Kabel zwischen dem Kabel- oder DSL-Modem und dem Router um das mit dem Modem gelieferte Kabel handelt. Abhngig von dem Verbindungstyp, den Ihr Modem verwendet, bentigen Sie entweder ein ge-

rades oder ein gekreuztes Ethernet-Kabel (das gerade Kabel ist das blichere). Nach dem Anschlieen eines PCs leuchten einige der LEDs an der Vorderseite des Routers nicht.

Die einwandfreie Funktion einer Verbindung ist bereits gewhrleistet, wenn nur die LED Link/Actleuchtet. 3. Ich kann keine Verbindung zum Internet herstellen und nicht auf die Setup-Seite des Routers zugreifen. Was muss ich berprfen?

A. Prfen Sie zunchst, ob das Kabel- oder DSL-Modem und die Computer richtig mit dem Router verbunden sind. In der Antwort zur Frage Nr. 2 ist beschrieben, wie Sie diese Verbindungen berprfen. B. Prfen Sie dann, ob Sie die PCs richtig fr die Kommunikation mit dem Router konfig-

uriert haben. Nachfolgend finden Sie Anweisungen hierzu fr die verschiedenen Versionen von Windows.

- Windows 95, 98 oder Me

Klicken Sie auf das Men Start und dann auf Ausfhren. Wenn das Fenster Ausfhren angezeigt wird, geben Sie im Feld ffnen die Zeichenfolge winipcfg ein. Klicken Sie anschlieend auf die Schaltflche OK. Wenn das Fenster IP-Konfiguration angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf das grau unterlegte Feld mit dem schwarzen, nach unten weisenden Pfeil. Nun wird eine Liste mit Netzwerkkarten angezeigt. Whlen Sie die Karte aus, mit der Sie die Verbindung zum Internet herstellen. Diese Karteneintrge drfen nicht die Zeichenfolgen PPP, VPN, AOL oder DF-Adapter enthalten. Das Feld IP-Adresse muss die IP-Adresse 192.168.1.100 bzw. 192.168.1.xxx enthalten, wobei xxx fr eine Zahl grer 100 steht. Befindet sich Ihre IP-

Adresse nicht in diesem Bereich, drcken Sie die Reset-Taste an der Vorderseite des Routers lnger als 30 Sekunden. Hierdurch wird der Router auf die Werksvorgabe zurckgesetzt, daher mssen Sie anschlieend die Setup-Seite des Routers neu konfigurieren. Fhren Sie nach der Neukonfiguration der Setup-

Seite einen Neustart des Computers aus.

- Windows NT, 2000 und XP

Klicken Sie auf das Men Start und dann auf Ausfhren. Wenn das Fenster Ausfhren angezeigt wird, geben Sie im Feld ffnen die Zeichenfolge cmd ein. Klicken Sie anschlieend auf die Schaltflche OK. Hierdurch wird eine Eingabeaufforderung angezeigt. Geben Sie ipconfig /all ein, und drcken Sie dann die Eingabetaste. 74

Das Feld IP-Adresse muss die IP-Adresse 192.168.1.100 bzw. 192.168.1.xxx enthalten, wobei xxx fr eine Zahl grer 100 steht. Befindet sich Ihre IP-

Adresse nicht in diesem Bereich, drcken Sie die Reset-Taste an der Vorderseite des Routers lnger als 30 Sekunden. Hierdurch wird der Router auf die Werksvorgabe zurckgesetzt, daher mssen Sie die Setup-Seite des Routers neu konfigurieren. Fhren Sie nach der Neukonfiguration der Setup-Seite einen Neustart des Computers aus. C. Anschlieend konfigurieren Sie einige Einstellungen von Windows.

- Doppelklicken Sie auf dem Desktop auf Arbeitsplatz und dann auf Systemsteuerung

(bei Verwendung der Standardoberflche von Windows XP klicken Sie auf Start und whlen dann Systemsteuerung).

- Wenn das Fenster Systemsteuerung angezeigt wird, doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol Internetoptionen (bei Verwendung der Standardoberflche von Windows XP klicken Sie auf Netzwerk- und Internetverbindungen und dann auf Internetoptionen).

- Wenn das Fenster Internetoptionen angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte

- Aktivieren Sie die Option Keine Verbindung whlen. (Wenn diese Option abgeblendet Verbindungen. ist, mssen Sie nichts ndern.)

- Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche LAN-Einstellungen in der unteren rechten Ecke.

- Wenn das Fenster Einstellungen fr lokales Netzwerk (LAN) angezeigt wird, deaktivieren Sie alle Kontrollkstchen.

- Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche OK und anschlieend auf die Schaltflche bernehmen (wenn Sie keine nderungen vornehmen mussten, ist die Schaltflche bernehmen abgeblendet). Klicken Sie anschlieend erneut auf die Schaltflche OK.

- Schlieen Sie die Systemsteuerung, und starten Sie Ihren Computer neu. 4. Wenn ich auf das Symbol fr den Internetzugang klicke und die Benutzer-

name/Kennwort-Kombination eingebe, die mir mein ISP mitgeteilt hat, kann ich keine Verbindung zum Internet herstellen. Was ist der Fehler?

Sie verwenden die von Ihrem ISP bereitgestellte Software. Verwenden Sie stattdessen Internet Explorer bzw. Netscape Navigator. Diese Browser knnen Sie von Ihrem Desktop aus (unter Windows XP aus dem Startmen) aufrufen. 5. Wenn ich Internet Explorer verwende, wird ein Feld eingeblendet, dass zum Herstellen einer DF-Verbindung auffordert. Wie kann ich diese Einstellung deaktivieren?

A. Doppelklicken Sie auf dem Desktop auf Arbeitsplatz und dann auf Systemsteuerung

(bei Verwendung der Standardoberflche von Windows XP klicken Sie auf Start und whlen dann Systemsteuerung). B. Wenn das Fenster Systemsteuerung angezeigt wird, doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol Internetoptionen (bei Verwendung der Standardoberflche von Windows XP klicken Sie auf Netzwerk- und Internetverbindungen und dann auf Internetoptionen). C. Wenn das Fenster Internetoptionen angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte Verbindungen. 75 Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch D. Aktivieren Sie die Option Keine Verbindung whlen. E. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche bernehmen. F. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche OK. 6. Es wird keine ausreichende Signalstrke oder Verbindungsqualitt angezeigt;

was kann ich tun?

A. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die WLAN-LED des Routers leuchtet. B. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass alle Ihre kabellosen PCs den Infrastrukturmodus verwen-

den. 7. Wie kann ich die Betriebsreichweite des Routers verbessern?

A. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Router mglichst hoch ber dem Boden aufgestellt ist. in der Nhe keine groen elektrischen B. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass sich

(wie beispielsweise Lautsprecher, Schaltschrnke, Strungsquellen befinden Leuchtstoffrhren, Mikrowellengerte usw.) C. Wechseln Sie den verwendeten Wireless-Kanal. Hierzu gehen Sie wie folgt vor:

ffnen Sie Ihren Webbrowser, und geben Sie im Adressfeld http://192.168.1.1 ein. Lassen Sie im Dialogfeld Enter Network Password (Netzwerkkennwort eingeben) das Feld User Name (Benutzername) leer, und geben Sie admin als Kennwort ein. Klicken Sie anschlieend auf OK. ndern Sie auf der Registerkarte Setup den Kanal auf 1. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Apply (bernehmen) um die Einstellungen zu speich-

ern.

- Wiederholen Sie diesen Vorgang, bis Sie den Kanal mit der besten Reichweite gefunden haben. Konfigurieren der Wireless-Sicherheit Hinweis: Die WEP-Verschlsselung ist ein zustzliches Mittel zur Datensicherheit und fr die Funktion des Routers nicht erforderlich. WEP steht als Abkrzung fr Wired Equivalent Privacy, ein Verschlsse-

lungsverfahren zum Schutz Ihrer kabellosen Datenkommunikation. WEP verwendet eine Kombination aus 64-Bit- oder 128-Bit-Schlsseln, um den Zugriff auf das Netzwerk zu kontrollieren und die einzelnen Datenbertragungen sicher zu verschls-

seln. Um eine Datenbertragung zu decodieren, muss jeder Access Point im Netzwerk einen identischen 64-Bit- bzw. 128-Bit-Schlssel verwenden. Hhere Verschlsse-

lungsstrken gewhrleisten zwar eine hhere Sicherheit, aufgrund der Komplexitt der Verschlsselung knnen sie jedoch eine verminderte Netzwerkleistung bewirken. Vielleicht haben Sie im Zusammenhang mit der WEP-Verschlsselung auch den Begriff 40-Bit gehrt. Auch damit ist die 64-Bit-WEP-Verschlsselung gemeint. Diese WEP-Verschlsselungsstufe wird 40-Bit genannt, weil sie einen geheimen 40-Bit-

Schlssel zusammen mit einem 24-Bit-Initialisierungsvektor verwendet (40 + 24 = 64). Die Hersteller von Wireless-Gerten verwenden beide Bezeichnungen. Linksys bezeich-

net diese Verschlsselungsstufe mit 64-Bit. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass Ihr kabelloses Netzwerk funktioniert, bevor Sie versuchen, die WEP-Verschlsselung zu konfigurieren. Ein nach dem 128-Bit-WEP-Verfahren verschlsseltes kabelloses Netzwerk kann NICHT mit einem nach dem 64-Bit-WEP-Verfahren verschlsselten kabellosen Netzwerk kommunizieren. Vergewissern Sie sich daher, dass alle Ihre kabellosen Gerte die gleiche Verschlsselungsstufe verwenden. Alle kabellosen Gerte, die der Norm 802.11b entsprechen, untersttzen 64-Bit-WEP. Linksys empfiehlt nicht nur, WEP zu aktivieren, sondern darber hinaus auch folgende Sicherheitsmanahmen zu ergreifen:

ndern der SSID von der Vorgabe linksys

Regelmiges ndern des WEP-Schlssels Hinweis: Mchten Sie die WEP-Verschlsselung aktivieren, mssen zuerst die Wireless-

Funktionen aktiviert sein. Whlen Sie auf der Registerkarte Wireless (Kabellos) des Routers die Option Enable (Aktivieren), bevor Sie fortfahren. 76 77 Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch Die folgenden Schritte zeigen Ihnen, wie Sie die WEP-Verschlsselung einsetzen. 1. Whlen Sie auf der Registerkarte Setup des Web-Dienstprogramms im Abschnitt WEP die Option Mandatory (Obligatorisch). 2. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche WEP Key Setting (WEP-Schlsseleinstellung), um den Typ und die Stufe der WEP-Verschlsselung einzustellen.

WEP (64-Bit oder 128-Bit) Whlen Sie die Verschlsselungsstufe aus dem Dropdownfeld. Die 128-Bit-WEP-Verschlsselung von Linksys ist herstellerspezi-

fisch und mglicherweise nicht kompatibel mit der WEP-Verschlsselung anderer Hersteller. Hinweis: Um die WEP-Verschlsselung einsetzen zu knnen, muss diese bei allen Access Points in Ihrem kabellosen Netzwerk aktiviert und auf dieselbe Schlsseleinstellung eingestellt sein. 3. Nun wird gegebenenfalls das in Abbildung C-1 dargestellte Dialogfeld angezeigt, in Der WEP-Schlssel wird nach einem der folgenden beiden Verfahren generiert:

dem besttigt wird, dass Sie die WEP-

Ve r s c h l s s e l u n g aktivieren. Klicken Sie auf die Schalt-

flche OK, um fort-

zufahren. 4. Nun wird das in Abbildung C-1 Abbildung C-2 dargestellte Dialogfeld angezeigt. Hier knnen Sie Ihre WEP-

Verschlsselungseinstellungen whlen. 1. Durch Verwendung eines Kennwortsatzes a. Geben Sie einen Kennwortsatz als benutzerdefiniertes Kennwort in das Feld Passphrase (Kennwortsatz) ein. Der Kennwortsatz kann bis zu 31 Buchstaben, Sonderzeichen und Ziffern enthalten. Leerzeichen sind nicht zulssig. b. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Generate (Generieren), um einen Schlssel zu erstellen. Wenn Sie die 64-Bit-Verschlsselung gewhlt haben, besteht der Schlssel aus 10 Ziffern, bei der 128-Bit-Verschlsselung aus 26 Ziffern. Mit diesem Schlssel werden die zwischen dem Router und den kabellosen PCs des Netzwerks bertragenen Daten verschlsselt bzw. entschlsselt. Im Feld Key (Schlssel) werden mglicherweise nicht alle Ziffern angezeigt. In diesem Fall klicken Sie mit der Maus an eine beliebige Stelle in diesem Feld. Verschieben Sie den Mauszeiger nach rechts, um den Rest des Schlssels anzuzeigen. Der gesamte Schlssel muss exakt so bernommen werden, wie er angezeigt wird. 2. Alternativ knnen Sie einen Schlssel auch manuell eingeben. Notieren Sie sich den Kennwortsatz bzw. den manuellen Schlssel. Sie bentigen diese Angaben fr die anderen kabellosen Gerte im Netzwerk, da bei diesen immer derselbe WEP-Schlssel eingegeben werden muss. Nachdem Sie das Verschlsselungsverfahren ausgewhlt und entweder den Kennwortsatz oder einen manuellen Schlssel eingegeben haben, klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Apply (bernehmen). Damit ist die Verschlsselungskomponente des Setup abgeschlossen. Hinweis: Unter Windows XP wird der vom Router generierte 128-Bit-

Schlssel 104-Bit-Schlssel (26 Ziffern) genannt und der vom Router generierte 64-Bit-Schlssel heit 40-Bit-Schlssel

(10 Ziffern). Abbildung C-2 78 79 Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch Konfigurieren der Wireless-Sicherheit unter Windows XP Da Windows XP die Verwendung der Linksys-Kennwortsatzfunktion mit Wireless PC-

Karten nicht gestattet, mssen Sie den im vorherigen Abschnitt generierten Schlssel manuell eingeben. Die folgenden Schritte zeigen Ihnen, wie Sie WEP aktivieren und den Schlssel fr Ihre kabellosen PC-Karten manuell eingeben, um Ihr Windows XP-System fr die kabellose Kommunikation mit dem Router einzurichten. Fr diese Schritte wird vorausgesetzt, dass der Laufwerkbuchstabe Ihres CD-ROM-

Laufwerks D lautet und dass Sie Windows XP im Standardmodus ausfhren. Auerdem muss Ihnen der vom Router generierte WEP-Schlssel vorliegen. 1. Wie in Abbildung C-3 gezeigt, klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Start und ffnen die Systemsteuerung. 2. Klicken Sie im Fenster Systemsteuerung auf das Symbol Netzwerk- und Internetverbindungen (siehe Abbildung C-4). 3. Klicken Sie auf das Symbol Netzwerkverbindungen (siehe Abbildung C-5). Abbildung C-4 Abbildung C-3 Abbildung C-5 4. Nun wird das Fenster Netzwerkverbindungen angezeigt (siehe Abbildung C-6). Unter LAN oder Hochgeschwindigkeitsinternet sehen Sie alle Netzwerkkarten, die in Ihrem Computer installiert und aktiviert sind. Klicken Sie dann auf das Symbol Drahtlose Netzwerkverbindung zu Ihrer Wireless-Karte. Wird das Fenster Status von Drahtlose Netzwerkverbindung angezeigt, fahren Sie mit dem nchsten Schritt fort. 80 81 Instant Wireless-Serie Wireless Access Point-Router mit 4-Port-Switch Wird das Fenster Mit dem drahtlosen Netzwerk verbinden angezeigt, klicken Sie unter Verfgbare Netzwerke auf das gewnschte Netzwerk, das ber die SSID des Routers angegeben ist. Doppelklicken Sie dann auf das Symbol Drahtlose Netzwerkverbindung. 6. Wird das Fenster von Eigenschaften Netzwerk Drahtloses angezeigt

(siehe Abbildung C-8), klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte Drahtlose Netzwerke. Abbildung C-6 5. Wird das Fenster Status von Drahtlose Netzwerkverbindung angezeigt (siehe Abbildung C-7), klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche Eigenschaften. Abbildung C-8 7. Wird im Abschnitt Bevor-

zugte Netzwerke das entsprechende kabellose Netzwerk ber die SSID des Routers angezeigt

(siehe Abbildung C-9), doppelklicken Sie darauf und fahren mit dem nch-

sten Schritt fort. Andernfalls klicken Sie im Abschnitt Verfgbare Netz-

werke auf das entspre-

chende, ber die SSID des Routers angezeigte Netzwerk. Klicken Sie anschlieend die t f l c h e S c h a l Konfigurieren. auf Abbildung C-7 82 Abbildung C-9 83 Instant Wireless-Serie 8. Das Fenster Eigenschaften von Drahtloses Netzwerk (siehe Abbildung C-10) wird angezeigt. Klicken Sie auf das Kontrollkstchen fr die Option Datenverschlsselung (WEP aktiviert). Deaktivieren Optionen Netzwerkauthentifizierung (gemeinsamer Modus) und Schlssel wird automa-

tisch bereitgestellt. Kontrollkstchen Sie die die fr Geben Sie im Feld Netzwerkschlssel den exakten, vom Router generierten Schlssel ein (alle 10 bzw. 26 Ziffern, abhngig von der Verschlsselungsstufe). Vergewissern Sie sich, dass im Feld Schlsselformat die Option Hexadezimalziffern und im Feld Schlssellnge entweder die Option 40 Bits

(10 Ziffern) oder 104 Bits (26 Ziffern) angezeigt wird. Wird keine Optionen angezeigt, haben Sie den Schlssel falsch eingegeben. diese Abbildung C-10 Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflche OK, um die Einstellungen zu speichern. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflchen OK, bis Sie wieder zum Fenster Status von Drahtlose Netzwerkverbindung zurckgekehrt sind. Schlieen Sie alle offenen Fenster, um zum Desktop von Windows XP zurckzukehren. Beenden Sie alle Anwendungen, und starten Sie Ihren PC neu. Nach dem Neustart ist die WEP-Konfiguration abgeschlossen, und Sie sollten eine kabellose Verbindung zum Router herstellen knnen. 84 85 COPYRIGHT E MARCHI REGISTRATI Copyright 2002 Linksys. Tutti i diritti sono riser-

vati. Instant Wireless un marchio della Linksys. Microsoft, Windows e il logotipo Windows sono marchi registrati della Microsoft Corporation. Tutti gli altri marchi e nomi commerciali sono di propriet dei rispettivi titolari. DICHIARAZIONE RELATIVA ALLA NORMATIVA FCC In base alle prove eseguite sullap-

parecchio Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte si deter-

minato che esso conforme ai limiti relativi ai dispositivi digitali di classe B, secondo la Parte 15 delle norme emanate dallFCC (ente federale statunitense per le telecomuni-

cazioni). Tali norme sono state concepite per fornire una protezione adeguata da inter-

ferenze pericolose in ambienti residenziali. Questo apparecchio genera, utilizza e pu irradiare energia a radiofrequenza e, se non installato e impiegato seguendo le istruzioni, pu causare interferenze dannose alle trasmissioni radio. Tuttavia non si pu garantire che non si verificheranno interferenze in installazioni specifiche. Se questo apparecchio causasse interferenze dannose alle trasmissioni radio o televisive, con-

dizione determinabile spegnendo e accendendo lapparecchio, si suggerisce allutente di cercare di eliminare le interferenze adottando una o pi delle seguenti misure:

orientare diversamente o spostare lantenna ricevente;

porre lapparecchio ad una maggiore distanza dallimpianto ricevente;

collegare lapparecchio a una presa di corrente diversa da quello dell'impianto ricevente;

richiedere assistenza a un rivenditore o a un tecnico radiotelevisivo esperto. Sommario Introduzione Passaggio 1: Collegamento del router Passaggio 2: Configurazione dei PC Passaggio 3: Configurazione del router Guida 88 90 92 96 100 Configurazione della protezione Wireless 105 Configurazione della protezione Wireless in Windows XP 108 Per assistenza, rivolgersi alla Linksys ai seguenti indirizzi:

E-mail Web europe-support@linksys.com latam-soporte@linksys.com http://www.linksys.com/international 86 87 Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte Introduzione Grazie per aver scelto Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router. Questo router con-

sentir di configurare una rete con i propri PC e di condividere il collegamento a Internet. In che modo il router realizza tutto ci? Collegando il modem cable o DSL direttamente al router e utilizzando le porte Ethernet del router per collegare i PC, come se ogni PC fosse collegato direttamente a Internet. In questo modo, possibile disporre di diversi PC in grado di utilizzare simultaneamente un collegamento Internet. Inoltre, poich un Access Point, il router pu creare un ponte di collegamento tra la rete Ethernet e i PC Wireless. Qual il significato di tutto ci quindi?

Le reti sono strumenti utili per la condivisione delle risorse del computer. possibile accedere a una stampante da computer differenti e accedere ai dati ubicati sullunit disco rigido di un altro computer. Le reti vengono inoltre utilizzate per i videogiochi in modalit multiplayer. Non sono quindi destinate solamente ad un uso domestico e di ufficio, ma hanno anche una funzione ludica. I PC collegati alle quattro porte LAN del router, se configurati in modo appropriato, creano una LAN o Local Area Network (rete locale). Vengono collegati con un cavo Ethernet inseri-

to nelladattatore Ethernet del computer ad unestremit e in una delle porte LAN del router

(con numero progressivo da uno a quattro) allaltra estremit. Il termine Ethernet viene utilizzato per fare riferimento agli accessori di rete, come cavi e adattatori, poich il termine Ethernet fa riferimento al tipo di rete che si sta configurando. Nella documentazione relati-

va al router, il termine Ethernet fa riferimento agli accessori che trasferiscono i dati del computer a una velocit compresa tra 10 Mbps e 100 Mbps. I termini 10 Mbps e 100 Mbps fanno riferimento alla velocit utilizzata dai dispositivi di rete. Il trasferimento dei dati alla velocit di 10 Mbps, equivalente al trasferimento del contenuto di oltre sette floppy disk al secondo. Gli accessori di rete che funzionano alla velocit di 100 Mbps trasferiscono i dati a una velocit 10 volte superiore. I PC possono inoltre interagire con il router in modalit Wireless. Configurando i PC in modalit Wireless con le stesse impostazioni Wireless del router, possibile creare un ponte di collegamento tra i PC in modalit Wireless, integrandoli comunque nella rete Ethernet esistente. Tuttavia, la funzione pi importante del router che consente di condividere il collegamen-

to cable o DSL. Ci viene effettuato collegando il modem cable o DSL alla porta WAN del router con un cavo Ethernet. (WAN lacronimo di Wide Area Network). Internet una rete che, essendo globale, ricopre unarea vastissima. I PC collegati al router condividono tale collegamento. 88 Le istruzioni fornite in questa Guida di avviamento rapido facilitano il collegamento al router, la configurazione dei PC e la configurazione del router nella rete. Tali istruzioni dovrebbero essere sufficienti per configurare e mettere in esecuzione una rete di base, condividendo lac-

cesso a Internet. Il router dispone inoltre di funzioni pi avanzate il cui utilizzo per con-

sigliato solo a chi ha familiarit con router e reti. Questi e altri problemi sono trattati nel Manuale dellutente sul CD-ROM di Setup Wizard (Installazione guidata). Quanto segue ci che si andr a configurare Limpostazione del router simile a quella mostrata nella figura prece-

dente per qualsiasi PC Windows. Il router consente di condividere la connessione cable o DSL tra pi computer a casa o in ufficio. Questo tipo di connessione definito Local Area Network

(rete locale) o LAN. Questa Guida di avviamento rapido fornisce un quadro generale di ci che occorre per impostare una rete di base in casa o in ufficio. Nelle tre sezioni successive viene spiegato come impostare e configurare i propri apparecchi per consentire un accesso a Internet con-

diviso ad alta velocit. Passaggio 1: Collegamento del router Lutente viene assistito nel processo di collegamento del router al modem cable o DSL. Viene quindi mostrato in che modo i PC sono collegati al router. Passaggio 2: Configurazione dei PC Viene descritto in che modo i PC sono configurati per comunicare con il router. Passaggio 3: Configurazione del router Lutente viene assistito in alcune impostazioni di base del router, che ne consentono il fun-

zionamento con il modem cable o DSL e le impostazioni del proprio ISP. NNoottaa::questa Guida di avviamento rapido indicher allutente le modalit di configu-

razione del router con cavi Ethernet. Mentre il router pu essere configurato attraverso un collegamento Wireless, i dettagli relativi alla configurazione del router in modalit Wireless non verranno approfonditi in questa Guida di avviamento rapido. Gli utenti che desiderassero configurare il router attraverso il collegamento Wireless, dovrebbero fare riferimento al sito Web di Linksys: www.linksys.com. 89 Passaggio 1: Collegamento del router B. Utilizzando un cavo Ethernet, collegare la porta LAN o Ethernet del modem cable o DSL alla porta WAN del router. Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte Nel passaggio 1, si collegher il router al modem cable o DSL e ai computer di casa o di ufficio. Innanzitutto, accertarsi che tutti gli apparecchi da utilizzare, inclusi i PC, il modem e il router, siano scollegati dalla fonte di alimentazione. A. Se non gi stato fatto, collegare correttamente il modem cable o DSL, ovvero utiliz-

zando il jack coassiale con il modem cable (Figura A1) o il jack telefonico con il modem DSL (Figura A2). Seguire le istruzioni fornite nel manuale di installazione allegato al modem cable o DSL. B C. Collegare un cavo Ethernet alla-

dattatore Ethernet del PC. Collegare laltra estremit del cavo a una delle porte LAN del router. Ripetere questo processo per ogni PC che si desidera colle-

gare al router. C1 Nota: se ladattatore Ethernet del PC non configurato, fare riferimento alla documen-

tazione relativa alladattatore Ethernet per ulteriori informazioni. Per semplicit di installazione, iniziare con la Porta LAN 1 sul router, proseguire con la Porta 2, la Porta 3 e per finire con la Porta 4. Se si stanno collegando pi di quattro PC al router, sar necessario collegare un hub o switch alla porta Uplink del router (se si uti-

lizza la porta Uplink, non possibile utiliz-

zare la Porta 4). Per informazioni sul col-

legamento tramite porta Uplink, fare riferi-

mento al Manuale dellutente contenuto nel CD-ROM dellInstallazione guidata. C2 D. Collegare lalimentatore di corrente alla porta di alimentazione del router. Successivamente, collegare lalimentatore a una presa di corrente. Attivare il modem cable o DSL. Quindi accendere il primo PC che si desidera utilizzare durante la configurazione del router. Procedere al passaggio 2: Configurazione dei PC, alla pagina successiva. A.1 90 A.2 91 Passaggio 2: Configurazione dei PC Se si utilizza:

Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte Nel passaggio 2, verr configurato ogni computer per la comunicazione con il router. Per effettuare ci, sar necessario configurare le impostazioni di rete del PC in modo che ottenga un indirizzo IP (o TCP/IP) automaticamente. I computer utilizzano gli indirizzi IP per comunicare reciprocamente attraverso una rete o attraverso Internet. Determinare il tipo di sistema operativo utilizzato dal computer: Windows 95, 98, Millennium, 2000 o XP. necessario conoscere il tipo di sistema operativo utilizzato dal computer. possibile determinarlo facendo clic sul pulsante Start/Avvio e successiva-

mente selezionando lopzione Impostazioni. (Se il menu Start/Avvio non dispone del-

lopzione Impostazioni, il sistema utilizzato Windows XP. possibile selezionare il Pannello di controllo direttamente dal menu Start/Avvio). Successivamente, fare clic su Pannello di controllo e fare doppio clic sullicona Sistema. Fare clic sul pulsante Annulla al termine. Una volta determinato il sistema operativo Windows utilizzato, seguire le istruzioni riportate in questo passaggio relative al sistema operativo del proprio computer. possibile sia ne-

cessario effettuare ci per ogni computer da collegare al router. Le pagine successive forniscono allutente le indicazioni, passo dopo passo, per configurare le impostazioni TCP/IP, sulla base del tipo di sistema operativo Windows utilizzato. Una volta configurati i computer, proseguire con il passaggio 3: Configurazione del router A. Fare clic sul pulsante Start/Avvio, quindi su Impostazioni e aprire il Pannello di control-

lo. Da tale posizione, fare doppio clic sullicona Rete per aprire la schermata relativa alla rete. B. Selezionare la scheda Configurazione e evi-

denziare la voce TCP/IP relativa alladattatore Ethernet* utilizzabile. Se il termine TCP/IP viene visualizzato da solo, selezionarlo**. Successivamente, fare clic sul pulsante Propriet. B C. Fare clic sulla scheda IP e selezionare Ottieni automaticamente un ind-

irizzo IP. Indirizzo D. Fare clic sulla scheda Gateway e verificare che il campo Gateway installati sia vuoto. Fare clic sul pulsante OK. E. Fare nuovamente clic sul pulsante OK. Windows potrebbe richiedere il disco originale di installazione di Windows o file aggiuntivi. Fornire tali file, indicando lubicazione corretta degli stessi: ad esempio, D:\win98, D:\win9x, c:\windows\options\cabs , ecc. (Ci presuppone che D corrisponda alla lettera dellu-

nit CD-ROM). C F. Se Windows richiede di riavviare il PC, fare clic sul pulsante S. Se Windows non richiede il riavvio, riavviare comunque il computer.

*Nota: non selezionare una voce TCP/IP il cui nome contenga DUN, PPPoE, VPN o AOL.

**Nota: se non elencata una linea TCP/IP, fare riferimento al Manuale dellutente con-

tenuto nel CD-ROM dellInstallazione guidata o nella documentazione relativa alladat-

tatore Ethernet per installare ora il protocollo TCP/IP. 92 93 Se si utilizza:

Windows 2000 A. Fare clic sul pulsante Start/Avvio, quindi su Impostazioni e aprire il Pannello di controllo. Da tale posizione, fare doppio clic sullicona Rete e connessioni remote. In questo modo verr visualizzata la schermata relativa alla Rete. B. Selezionare licona Connessione alla rete locale (LAN) per ladattatore Ethernet* utilizz-

abile (solitamente la prima Connessione alla rete locale elencata). Fare doppio clic su Connessione alla rete locale (LAN). C. Quando viene visualizzata la schermata Stato di Connessione alla rete locale (LAN), fare clic sul pulsante Propriet. D. Selezionare Protocollo Internet (TCP/IP) e fare clic sul pulsante Propriet. E. Selezionare Ottieni automaticamente un indi-

rizzo IP e fare clic sul pulsante OK sulle scher-

mate successive per completare la configu-

razione del PC. F. Riavviare il computer.

*Nota: non selezionare una voce TCP/IP il cui nome contenga DUN, PPPoE, VPN o AOL. C D E Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte Se si utilizza:

Windows XP Le istruzioni seguenti presuppongono lutilizzo del-

linterfaccia predefinita di Windows XP. Se si utilizza linterfaccia Classica (in cui le icone e i menu hanno lo stesso aspetto delle precedenti versioni di Window), seguire le istruzioni relative a Windows 2000. A. Fare clic sul pulsante Start, aprire il Pannello di controllo e fare clic sullicona Rete e connes-

sioni Internet. Successivamente, fare clic sul-

licona Connessioni di rete per visualizzare la schermata relativa alla Rete. B. Selezionare licona Connessione alla rete locale (LAN) per ladattatore Ethernet* utilizz-

rizzo IP e fare clic sul pulsante OK sulle scher-

mate successive per completare la configu-

razione del PC. F. Riavviare il computer. C D E 94 95 Passaggio 3: Configurazione del router C. Se richiesto dallISP, immettere lHost Name (Nome host) e il Domain Name (Nome dominio) del router nei campi appropriati della scheda Setup (Configurazione). (Ci viene richiesto solitamente dagli ISP che offrono una connessione cable). Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte Nel passaggio 3, verr configurato il router per il funzionamento nella propria rete e per ottenere laccesso a Internet tramite il proprio ISP (Internet Service Provider). LISP potrebbe richiedere lutilizzo di un Nome host e di un Nome dominio. Inoltre, verr configurato il tipo di configurazione WAN (WAN Configuration Type) sulla scheda Setup (Configurazione) del router sulla base delle informazioni fornite dallISP. Tali informazioni di configurazione sono messe a disposizione dallISP.Se non si in possesso di tali informazioni, contattare il pro-

prio ISP prima di continuare. Per determinare le informazioni da richiedere allISP, fare riferi-

mento alla domanda n1 contenuta nella sezione Guida. Le istruzioni fornite dallISP indicano le modalit di configurazione del PC per laccesso a Internet. Poich ora si sta utilizzando il router per la condivisione dellaccesso a Internet tra diversi computer, tali informazioni di configurazione verranno impiegate per la configu-

razione router. A. Aprire il browser Web. ( normale che venga visualizzato un messaggio di errore a questo punto. Continuare a seguire queste istruzioni). Immettere 192.168.1.1 nel campo Indirizzo del browser Web e premere il tasto Invio. A B. Viene visualizzata la finestra Enter Network Password (Password di rete), mostrata nella figura A1. (Agli utenti di Windows XP verr visualizzata la finestra Connect to 192.168.1.1 (Connetti a 192.168.1.1), mostrata nella figura A2.). Lasciare il campo User Name (Nome utente) vuoto e immettere admin (la password predefinita) in caratteri minuscoli nel campo Password. Successivamente, fare clic sul pulsante OK. A.1 96 A.2 D. Per configurare il router per la rete Wireless, verificare che i campi Wireless della scheda Setup (Configurazione) (mostrati nella figura D) vengano comple-

tati nel modo seguente:

E n a b l e / D i s a b l e

(Abilita/Disabilita): La selezione del pulsante di opzione Enable

(Abilita), consentir labilitazione della funzionalit Wireless del router. Le funzionalit Wireless non saranno disponibili se non abilitate. D SSID: SSID (o ESSID) un nome univoco per la rete Wireless. Fa distinzione tra il maiuscolo e il minuscolo e non deve superare i 32 caratteri. LSSID predefinito linksys ma necessario modificarlo con un nome di rete Wireless personale. Tutte le postazioni della rete Wireless devono utilizzare lo stesso SSID. Channel (Canale): Selezionare il canale appropriato alla propria rete dallelenco forni-

to. Tutte le postazioni Wireless della rete devono utilizzare lo stesso canale per fun-

zionare in maniera appropriata. NNoottaa:: se si desidera modificare le impostazioni WEP del router, passare alla sezione Configurazione della protezione Wireless. E. Il router supporta cinque tipi di connessione: DHCP (ottiene un indirizzo IP automatica-

mente), PPPoE, Static IP Address (Indirizzo IP statico) , RAS e PPTP. Questi tipi vengono selezionati dal menu a discesa accanto a WAN Connection Type (Tipo di connessione WAN). La schermata Setup (Configurazione) e le funzionalit disponibili differiranno in relazione al tipo di connessione selezionata, le cui istruzioni sono incluse nel presente manuale:

1. Obtain an IP Automatically (Ottieni un indirizzo IP automaticamente) Se lISP determina che il collegamento avviene tramite un indirizzo IP dinamico (o DHCP), seguire i passaggi di seguito riportati:

a. Selezionare Obtain an IP automatically (Ottieni un indirizzo IP automaticamente) come tipo di connessione WAN (secondo quanto mostrato in precedenza nella figura D). b. Fare clic sul pulsante Apply (Applica) per salvare le impostazioni. 97 Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte 4. RAS RAS un servizio utilizzato solo a Singapore. Se si utilizza una connessione RAS, verificare con il proprio ISP le informazioni di configurazione necessarie. 5. PPTP PPTP un servizio utilizzato solo in Europa. Se si utilizza una connessione PPTP, verificare con il proprio ISP le informazioni di configurazione neces-

sarie. 2. Static IP (IP statico) Se lISP determina che il collegamento avviene tramite un indirizzo IP statico

(o fisso), seguire i passaggi riportati di seguito. a. Selezionare Static IP (IP statico) come tipo di connessione WAN. b. Nei campi accanto a Specify WAN IP Address (Specificare indirizzo IP WAN) immettere lindirizzo IP. c. d. e. Immettere la Subnet Mask. Immettere il Default Gateway Address (Indirizzo gateway predefinito). Immettere il DNS nei campi 1, 2 e/o 3. necessario immettere almeno un indirizzo DNS. E2 f. Fare clic sul pulsante Apply (Applica) per salvare le impostazioni. 3. PPPoE Se il provider DSL determina che il collegamento avviene tramite una connessione PPPoE o se di solito si immette un nome utente e una pass-

word per accedere a Internet, seguire i passaggi riportati di seguito. a. Selezionare PPPoE come tipo di connessione WAN. b. Immettere lo User Name (Nome utente). c. Immettere la Password. d. Fare clic sul pulsante Apply le salvare per

(Applica) impostazioni. e. Fare clic sulla scheda Status E3

(Stato) seguita dal pulsante Connect (Collegare) per avviare la connessione. E5 F. Se non ancora stato fatto, fare clic sul pulsante Apply (Applica) per salvare le impostazioni. G. Fornire di nuovo lalimentazione al modem cable o DSL e riavviare i computer. Le nuove impostazioni del router diventeranno effettive. Nota: necessario configurare il router solo da un computer. Se occorrono informazioni sulle impostazioni avanzate, visitare il sito Web dellassistenza di Linksys allindirizzo support.linksys.com o consultare il Manuale dellutente nel CD-ROM di Setup Wizard

(Installazione guidata). Congratulazioni. Il router stato correttamente configurato. possibile verificarne la configurazione aprendo una sessione del browser Web da un qualsiasi computer e immettendo www.linksys.com/registration. Se non si riesce a raggiungere il sito Web di Linksys, potrebbe essere necessario rivedere le impostazioni effettuate in questa sezione oppure consultare la sezione Guida in questa Guida di avviamento rapido. 98 99 Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte Guida

Nella sezione Guida sono contenute le domande pi frequenti relative alla connessione a Internet. In caso occorrano ulteriori informazioni sullinstallazione o sulle funzioni avanzate, andare allindirizzo kb.linksys.com o consultare il Manuale dellutente contenente unap-

pendice Risoluzione dei problemi, disponibile nel CD-ROM di Setup Wizard (Installazione guidata). 1. In caso di dubbio sulle informazioni da richiedere allInternet Service Provider

(ISP) per configurare e mettere in funzione la rete, quali domande si dovrebbero fare?

Di che tipo di connessione dispongo: indirizzo IP dinamico, indirizzo IP statico o PPPoE?

Se utilizzo un indirizzo IP dinamico, dovrei chiedere:

Qual il mio nome host (se necessario)?

Qual il mio nome dominio (se necessario)?

Se utilizzo un indirizzo IP statico, dovrei chiedere:

Qual il mio indirizzo IP?

Qual il mio gateway?

Qual il mio DNS?

Se utilizzo PPPoE (in genere utilizzato dagli ISP che offrono una connessione DSL), dovrei chiedere:

Qual il mio nome utente?

Qual la mia password?

Una volta ottenute le informazioni, seguire le istruzioni nella Guida di avviamento rapido al passaggio 3: Configurazione del router e immettere queste informazioni nella scheda Setup

(Configurazione). Nella sezione WAN Connection Type (Tipo di connessione WAN) fare riferi-

mento al grafico sulla pagina successiva:

Se si dispone di questo tipo di connessione:

Dynamic IP Address

(DHCP) (Indirizzo IP dinamico) Static IP Address

(Indirizzo IP statico) Seguire i passaggi riportati di seguito:

1. Selezionare Obtain an IP automatically (Ottieni un indiriz-

zo IP automaticamente) come tipo di connessione WAN. 2. Fare clic sul pulsante Apply (Applica) per salvare le impostazioni. 1. Selezionare Static IP (IP statico) come tipo di connessione 2. 3. 4. 5. WAN. Immettere lIP Address (Indirizzo IP). Immettere la Subnet Mask. Immettere il Gateway Address (Indirizzo gateway). Immettere il DNS nei campi 1, 2 e/o 3. necessario immet-

tere almeno un indirizzo DNS. 6. Fare clic sul pulsante Apply (Applica) per salvare le PPPoE RAS o PPTP impostazioni. 1. Selezionare Static IP (IP statico) come tipo di connessione WAN. Immettere lo User Name (Nome utente). Immettere la Password. 2. 3. 4. Fare clic sul pulsante Apply (Applica) per salvare le impostazioni. Se si utilizza RAS (Singapore SingTel) o PPTP (servizio europeo), verificare presso il proprio ISP le informazioni di configurazione necessarie. 2. Si stanno verificando dei problemi di connessione a Internet. Quali LED dovreb-

bero essere accesi sul pannello anteriore del router?

Si accender un LED del router per ogni collegamento correttamente effettuato sulla parte posteriore del router, sia che si tratti di un cavo Ethernet o di un cavo di ali-

mentazione. Di seguito sono riportati i tipici LED che si accendono dopo aver collegato un computer e un modem cable o DSL:

Quando il router acceso (ladattatore di alimentazione inserito nel router), il LED Power (Alimentazione) acceso. Quando un cavo Ethernet correttamente collegato tra un PC e la porta 4 del router, i LED Link/Act, Ful/Cole 100nella colonna 4 sono accesi. Con una connessione modem cable o DSL il LED WAN Link acceso. 100 101 Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte

Il LED WAN Link (collegamento WAN)non acceso. Quali verifiche occorre fare?

Verificare che il cavo utilizzato per collegare il modem cable o DSL al router sia quello fornito in dotazione con il modem. A seconda del tipo di connessione uti-

lizzato dal modem, potrebbe essere necessario un cavo Ethernet semplice o incrociato (il tipo semplice quello pi comune). Alcune delle spie luminose sulla parte anteriore del router non si accendono quando si collega un PC.

Affinch una connessione funzioni correttamente sufficiente che sia acceso il LED Link/Act. 3. impossibile accedere a Internet o visualizzare la pagina per limpostazione del router. Quali verifiche occorre fare?

A. Innanzitutto controllare che il modem cable o DSL e i computer siano correttamente collegati al router. Per informazioni su come verificare che le connessioni funzionino correttamente, tornare alla domanda n. 2. B. Verificare quindi di aver configurato correttamente il PC per la comunicazione con il router. Di seguito sono riportate le istruzioni per diverse versioni di Windows.

- Windows 95, 98 o ME

Fare clic sul pulsante Start (Avvio) e scegliere Esegui. Nella finestra di dialogo Esegui immettere winipcfg nel campo Apri, quindi fare clic sul pulsante OK. Nella finestra Configurazione IP fare clic sulla casella grigia con una freccia nera rivolta verso il basso. Verr visualizzato un elenco di adattatori. Selezionare ladattatore da utilizzare per connettersi a Internet. Le voci dellelenco non devono contenere nel nome PPP, VPN, AOL o Dial-Up adapter. Nel campo Indirizzo IP sar visualizzato un indirizzo IP, come 192.168.1.100 o 192.168.1.xxx, dove xxx un numero maggiore di 100. Se lindirizzo IP visual-

izzato non rientra in questo intervallo, tenere premuto il pulsante Reset

(Ripristina) sulla parte anteriore del router per oltre 30 secondi. Verranno cos ripristinate le impostazioni predefinite del router e sar necessario riconfigurar-

lo attraverso la pagina Setup (Impostazione). Al termine, riavviare il computer.

- Windows NT, 2000 e XP

Fare clic sul pulsante Start (Avvio) e scegliere Esegui. Nella finestra di dialogo Esegui immettere cmd nel campo Apri, quindi fare clic sul pulsante OK. Verr visualizzato un prompt dei comandi. Immettere ipconfig /all, quindi pre-

mere il tasto Invio.

Nel campo Indirizzo IP sar visualizzato un indirizzo IP, come 192.168.1.100 o 192.168.1.xxx, dove xxx un numero maggiore di 100. Se lindirizzo IP visualizzato non rientra in questo intervallo, tenere premuto il pulsante Reset (Ripristina) sulla parte anteriore del router per pi di 30 secondi. Verranno cos ripristinate le impostazioni pre-

definite del router e sar necessario riconfigurarlo attraverso la pagina Setup

(Impostazione). Al termine, riavviare il computer. C. Configurare ora alcune impostazioni in Windows.

- Sul desktop fare doppio clic su Risorse del computer, quindi fare doppio clic su Pannello di controllo (per gli utenti di Windows XP che utilizzano linterfaccia pre-

definita, fare clic sul pulsante Start e scegliere Pannello di controllo).

- Nella finestra del Pannello di controllo fare doppio clic sullicona Opzioni Internet (per gli utenti di Windows XP che utilizzano linterfaccia predefinita, fare clic su Rete e con-

nessioni Internet, quindi scegliere Opzioni Internet).

- Nella finestra Opzioni Internet fare clic sulla scheda Connessioni.

- Selezionare Non utilizzare mai connessioni remote (questa opzione potrebbe anche essere inattiva). Fare clic sul pulsante Impostazioni LAN nellangolo inferiore destro.

- Nella finestra Impostazioni rete locale (LAN) deselezionare tutte le caselle.

Fare clic sul pulsante OK, quindi su Applica (se non stata apportata alcuna modifica, il pulsante Applica inattivo). Successivamente, fare di nuovo clic sul pulsante OK.

- Uscire dal Pannello di controllo e riavviare il computer. 4. impossibile eseguire la connessione a Internet anche dopo aver fatto clic sul-

licona per accedere a Internet e aver immesso il nome utente e la password for-

niti dallISP. Qual il problema?

Il problema deriva dal fatto che si sta utilizzando il software fornito dallISP. Utilizzare invece il browser Internet Explorer o Netscape Navigator situati sul desktop (nel menu di avvio in Windows XP). 5. Durante lutilizzo di Internet Explorer, viene visualizzata una finestra popup in cui viene richiesto di effettuare una connessione remota. Come possibile dis-

attivarla?

A. Sul desktop fare doppio clic su Risorse del computer, quindi fare doppio clic su Pannello di controllo (per gli utenti di Windows XP che utilizzano linterfaccia pre-

definita, fare clic sul pulsante Start e scegliere Pannello di controllo). B. Nella finestra del Pannello di controllo fare doppio clic sullicona Opzioni Internet (per gli utenti di Windows XP che utilizzano linterfaccia predefinita, fare clic su Rete e con-

nessioni Internet, quindi scegliere Opzioni Internet). C. Nella finestra Opzioni Internet fare clic sulla scheda Connessioni. 102 103 Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte D. Selezionare Non utilizzare mai connessioni remote. E. Fare clic sul pulsante Applica. F. Fare clic sul pulsante OK. 6. Cosa fare se non si riceve lintensit del segnale o la qualit del collegamento?

A. Verificare che il LED WLAN del router sia acceso. B. Verificare che tutti i PC wireless stiano utilizzando la modalit Infrastructure

(Infrastruttura). 7. In che modo possibile incrementare il raggio di azione del router?

A. Verificare che il router si trovi il pi in alto possibile da terra. B. Verificare che nelle vicinanze non vi siano grandi sorgenti di interferenze elettriche (ad esempio, altoparlanti, luci fluorescenti, forni a microonde e cos via). C. Cambiare il canale wireless in uso nel modo seguente:

Aprire una sessione del browser e digitare http://192.168.1.1 nel campo Indirizzo. Nella finestra Password di rete lasciare vuoto il campo Nome utente e digitare admin come password. Quindi fare clic su OK. Nella scheda Setup (Configurazione) impostare il canale su 1. Fare clic sul pulsante Apply (Applica) per salvare le impostazioni. Ripetere loperazione fino a trovare il canale che fornisce il migliore raggio di azione. Configurazione della protezione Wireless Nota: la crittografia WEP una misura di protezione dati aggiuntiva e non essenziale per il funzionamento del router. WEP, un acronimo di Wired Equivalent Privacy, un metodo di crittografia utilizzato per proteggere le comunicazioni dei dati in modalit Wireless. WEP utilizza una com-

binazione di chiavi a 64 bit o 128 bit per fornire il controllo di accesso alla rete e per fornire la protezione di tipo crittografico ad ogni trasmissione di dati. Per decodificare una trasmissione di dati, ogni postazione della rete deve utilizzare una chiave a 64 bit o a 128 bit identica. Livelli superiori di crittografia comportano livelli pi elevati di pro-

tezione, tuttavia, a causa della complessit della crittografia, potrebbero comportare un minore rendimento della rete. Quando si parla di crittografia WEP, ricorre a volte il termine 40 bit . Si tratta sem-

plicemente di un altro termine che sta ad indicare la codifica WEP a 64 bit. Questo li-

vello di crittografia WEP stato denominato a 40 bit poich si serve di una chiave se-

greta a 40 bit unitamente a un vettore di inizializzazione a 24 bit (40 + 24 = 64). pos-

sibile che i fornitori di accessori Wireless utilizzino una denominazione differente. Linksys utilizza il termine 64 bit quando fa riferimento a questo livello di crittografia. Accertarsi che la rete Wireless sia funzionante prima di tentare la configurazione della crittografia WEP. Una rete Wireless con crittografia WEP a 128 bit NON comunicher con una rete Wireless con crittografia WEP a 64 bit. Pertanto, accertarsi che tutti i dispositivi Wireless stiano utilizzando lo stesso livello di crittografia. Tutti i dispositivi Wireless conformi allo standard 802.11b supporteranno la crittografia WEP a 64 bit. Oltre ad abilitare la crittografia WEP, Linksys raccomanda inoltre le implementazioni di protezione seguenti:

Modificare lSSID predefinito linksys

Modificare la chiave WEP regolarmente Nota: per poter abilitare la Crittografia WEP, necessario prima abilitare le funzionalit Wireless. Selezionare Enable (Abilita) sulla scheda Wireless del router prima di continuare. 104 105 Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte I passaggi seguenti mostrano come utilizzare la crittografia WEP 1. Dalla scheda Utilitys setup (Configurazione dellUtilit) basata su Web, selezionare Mandatory (Obbligatorio) sotto la sezione WEP. 2. Premere il pulsante WEP Key Setting (Impostazione chiave WEP) per configu-

rare il tipo e il livello di Crittografia WEP. 3. possibile che venga visualizzata la schermata riportata nella figura C-1, che richiede la conferma d e l l a b i l i t a z i o n e della crittografia WEP. Premere il pulsante OK per continuare. Figura C-1 4. Ci porter alla visualizzazione della schermata riportata nella figura C-2. Da tale schermata, verranno scelte le impostazioni di crittografia WEP.

WEP (64 Bit o 128 Bit) Selezionare il livello di crittografia dalla casella a discesa. La crittografia WEP a 128 bit univoca per Linksys e potrebbe andare in conflitto con altre forme di crittografia WEP di altri fornitori. Nota: per poter utilizzare la crittografia WEP, tutte le postazioni nella rete Wireless devono avere il protocollo WEP abilitato e configurato con la stessa configurazione della chiave. La chiave di crittografia WEP viene generata in uno dei seguenti modi:

1. possibile creare una chiave di crittografia utilizzando una Passphrase. a. Immettere una Passphrase, una password definita dallutente, nel campo Passphrase. La Passphrase pu contenere un massimo di 31 lettere, simboli e numeri. Non possibile utilizzare spazi. b. Fare clic sul pulsante Generate (Genera) per creare una chiave. La chiave sar costituita da 10 cifre se stata scelta una crittografia a 64 -bit o da 26 cifre se stata scelta una crittografia a 128 bit. Questa chiave verr utilizzata per codifi-

care e decodificare i dati scambiati tra il router e i PC Wireless della rete. possibile che il campo Key (Chiave) non visualizzi tutte le cifre. Con il mouse, fare clic in qualsiasi punto del campo Key (Chiave). Spostare il cursore sulla destra per visualizzare il resto della chiave. Accertarsi di aver annotato lintera chiave ESATTAMENTE nel modo in cui viene visualizzata. 2. possibile immettere la chiave di crittografia manualmente. Prendere nota della Passphrase o della chiave manuale (Manual Key). Sar necessaria per gli altri dispositivi Wireless presenti nella rete, poich necessario immettere la stessa chiave di crittografia WEP per tutti i dispositivi Wireless presenti nella rete. Una volta scelto il metodo di crittografia a chiavi e una volta immessa la Passphrase o la chiave manuale, fare clic sul pulsante Apply (Applica) e la parte relativa alla crit-

tografia della configurazione completata. Nota: in Windows XP, una chiave a 128 bit generata dal router, verr denominata chiave a 104 bit (26 cifre) e una chiave a 64 bit verr denominata chiave a 40 bit (10 cifre). Figura C-2 106 107 Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte Configurazione della protezione Wireless in Windows XP Poich Windows XP non consente di utilizzare la funzionalit Passphrase di Linksys con gli adattatori Wireless del PC , sar necessario immettere manualmente la chiave generata nella sezione precedente. I passaggi seguenti consentiranno di abilitare il WEP e di immettere la chiave di crit-

tografia per le schede Wireless dei PC, al fine di consentire al sistema Windows XP di comunicare con il router in modalit Wireless. Questi passaggi presuppongono che allunit CD-ROM sia assegnata la lettera D e che si stia utilizzando Windows XP nella modalit predefinita. Accertarsi di disporre della chiave WEP generata dal router. 1. Secondo quanto visualizzato nella figura C-3, fare clic sul pulsante Start e portar-

si sul Pannello di controllo. 2. Nella finestra Pannello di controllo, fare clic sullicona Rete e connessioni Internet, riportata nella figura C-4. 3. Fare clic sullicona Connessioni di rete, riportata nella figura C-5. Figura C-4 Figura C-3 Figura C-5 4. Verr visualizzata la finestra Connessioni di rete , come riportato nella figura C-

6. Sotto la voce LAN o Internet ad alta velocit, verranno visualizzate tutte le schede di rete installate e funzionanti del computer. Fare doppio clic sullicona Connessione di rete Wireless associata alladattatore Wireless. Se viene visualizzata la finestra Stato di Connessione alla rete Wireless, pro-

seguire al passaggio successivo. 108 109 Serie Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router con switch a 4 porte Se viene visualizzata la finestra Connessione alla rete Wireless, nella sezione Reti disponibili, fare clic sulla rete Wireless desiderata, specificata dallSSID del router. Successivamente, fare doppio clic sullicona Connessione alla rete Wireless. 6. Quando viene visualizzata la finestra Propriet -

Connessione rete Wireless, secondo quanto riportato nella figura C-8, fare clic sulla scheda Reti Wireless. alla Figura C-6 5. Quando viene visualizzata la finestra Stato di connessione alla rete Wireless, come riportato nella figura C-7, fare clic sul pulsante Propriet. Figura C-8 7. Se la rete Wireless appro-

priata, specificata dallSSID del router, viene visualizzata nella sezione Reti pre-

ferite, come riportato nella figura C-9, fare doppio clic su di essa e proseguire al passaggio successivo. Altrimenti, fare clic sulla rete Wireless appropriata, specificata dallSSID del router, nella sezione Reti disponibili. Successi-

vamente, fare clic sul pul-

sante Configura. Figura C-7 110 Figura C-9 111 Serie Instant Wireless 8. Verr visualizzata la finestra Propriet - Rete Wireless (riportata nella figura C-10). Fare clic sulla casella di controllo relativa allopzione Crittografia dati (WEP abilita-

to). Deselezionare i campi Autenticazione di rete (Modalit condivisa) e La chiave viene fornita automaticamente. Nel campo Chiave di rete, immettere la chiave esatta (a 10 o 26 cifre, in relazione al livello di crittografia) generata dal router. Verificare che nel campo Formato chiave sia visualizzato Cifre esadecimali e nel campo Lunghezza chiave 40 bit (10 cifre) o 104 bit (26 cifre). Se ci non viene visualizzato, la chiave stata immessa in maniera non corretta. Figura C-10 Fare clic sul pulsante OK per salvare le impostazioni. Fare clic sui pulsanti OK fino a ritornare alla finestra Stato di Connessione di rete Wireless. Chiudere tutte le finestre aperte per ritornare al desktop di Windows XP. Chiudere tutte le applicazioni e riavviare il PC. Dopo il riavvio, la configurazione WEP completata e sar possibile connettersi in modalit Wireless al router. 112 113 DIREITOS DE AUTOR E MARCAS COMERCIAIS Copyright 2002 Linksys, Todos os direitos reservados. Instant Wireless uma marca comercial da Linksys. Microsoft, Windows e o logtipo Windows so marcas comerciais registadas da Microsoft Corporation. Todas as outras marcas comerciais e nomes de marcas pertencem aos respectivos proprietrios. DECLARAO DA FCC O router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas Instant Wireless foi tes-

tado e est em conformidade com os limites para um dispositivo digital da Classe B, de acordo com a Parte 15 das regras da FCC. Estas regras foram concebidas para pro-

porcionar uma proteco razovel contra interferncia nociva numa instalao residen-

cial. Este equipamento gera, utiliza e pode emitir energia de frequncia de rdio e, se no for instalado e utilizado de acordo com as instrues, pode causar interferncia nociva a comunicaes de rdio. No entanto, no existe qualquer garantia de que no ocorrer interferncia numa determinada instalao. Se este equipamento causar inter-

ferncia nociva recepo de rdio ou de televiso, o que pode ser determinado desli-

gando e voltando a ligar o equipamento, o utilizador dever tentar corrigir a interfern-

cia atravs de uma ou mais das seguintes medidas:

Alterar a orientao ou localizao da antena de recepo

Aumentar a distncia entre o equipamento ou dispositivo

Ligar o equipamento a uma tomada diferente da utilizada pelo receptor

Consultar um tcnico com experincia de rdio/TV ndice Introduo Passo 1: Ligao do router Passo 2: Configurao dos PCs Passo 3: Configurao do router Ajuda Configurar a segurana sem fios 116 118 120 124 128 133 Configurar a segurana sem fios no Windows XP 136 Para obter suporte tcnico, contacte-nos nos endereos abaixo indicados:

Correio electrnico Web europe-support@linksys.com latam-soporte@linksys.com http://www.linksys.com/international 114 115 Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas Introduo Obrigado por escolher o router de ponto de acesso sem fios Instant Wireless. Este router ir permitir-lhe configurar os seus PCs em rede e partilhar a ligao Internet. Como que o router lhe permite tudo isto? Ligando o modem por cabo ou DSL directamente ao router e utilizando as portas Ethernet do router para ligar os PCs, como se cada PC estivesse directamente ligado Internet. Desta forma, uma ligao Internet pode ser uti-

lizada simultaneamente por vrios PCs. Alm disso, por ser tambm um ponto de acesso, o router pode estabelecer uma ponte entre a rede Ethernet e os PCs sem fios. Mas o que significa tudo isto?

As redes so ferramentas teis para partilhar recursos informticos. possvel aceder a uma impressora a partir de diferentes computadores, bem como a dados localizados no disco rgido de outro computador. As redes so tambm usadas para jogos de computador multi-jogador. Ento, conclui-se que as redes no s so muito teis em casa e no escritrio, como podem ser tambm muito divertidas. Os PCs ligados s quatro portas LAN do router, depois de adequadamente configurados, constituem uma rede local (LAN: Local Area Network). Os computadores so ligados atravs de um cabo Ethernet que ligado, numa extremidade, ao adaptador de Ethernet do com-

putador e, na outra extremidade, a uma das portas LAN do router (numeradas de um a qua-

tro). O termo Ethernet utilizado para designar os acessrios de rede, tais como cabos e adaptadores, porque Ethernet se refere ao tipo de rede que est a ser configurado. Na do-

cumentao do router, Ethernet refere-se aos acessrios que transferem os dados do com-

putador de 10Mbps a 100Mbps. (10Mbps e 100Mbps referem-se s velocidades utilizadas pelos dispositivos de rede. Ao transferir dados a 10Mbps, est a mover o equivalente a mais de sete disquetes por segundo! Os acessrios de rede que funcionam a 100Mbps movem os dados dez vezes mais rapidamente!) Os PCs tambm podem interagir com o router sem fios. Ao configurar os PCs sem fios uti-

lizando as mesmas definies sem fios do router, possvel estabelecer uma ponte entres estes PCs sem fios, integrando-os na rede Ethernet existente. A funcionalidade mais espantosa do router , talvez, o facto de permitir partilhar a ligao por cabo ou DSL. Poder usufruir desta funcionalidade ligando o modem por cabo ou DSL porta WAN do router por meio de um cabo Ethernet (WAN refere-se a uma rede alargada:

Wide Area Network). A Internet uma rede global que abrange a maior rea possvel! Os PCs ligados ao router partilham esta ligao. Utilize as instrues neste manual de iniciao rpida para ligar o router, configurar os seus PCs e configurar o router na sua rede. Estas instrues devem ser suficientes para colocar uma rede bsica em funcionamento e partilhar o acesso Internet. O router tambm vem equipado com funes mais avanadas, mas estas no devem ser utilizadas sem uma com-

preenso mais aprofundada do funcionamento dos routers e das redes. Estas e outras questes so explicadas no manual do utilizador no CD-ROM do assistente de configurao. Esquema de configurao:

A configurao do router semelhante que mostrada na figura acima, para qualquer PC a executar o Windows. O router permite-lhe partilhar a sua ligao por cabo ou DSL entre vrios computadores em casa ou no escritrio. Esta chamada uma rede local ou LAN (Local Area Network). Este manual de iniciao rpida fornece-lhe uma perspectiva geral do que necessrio para configurar uma rede bsica em casa ou no escritrio. As trs seces que se seguem expli-

cam como configurar o equipamento de modo a permitir a partilha do acesso de alta veloci-

dade Internet. Passo 1: Ligao do router explicado o processo de ligao do router ao modem por cabo ou DSL. Em seguida, mostrado como os PCs so ligados ao router. Passo 2: Configurao dos PCs descrito como os PCs so configurados para comunicar com o router. Passo 3: Configurao do router So explicadas algumas das definies bsicas do router para que funcione com o modem por cabo ou DSL e com as definies do ISP. NNoottaa::Este manual de iniciao rpida ir ajud-lo a configurar o router com cabos Ethernet. Apesar de ser possvel configurar o router atravs de uma ligao sem fios, este manual de iniciao rpida no fornece pormenores sobre como configurar o router sem fios. Os utilizadores que pretendem configurar o router atravs de uma lig-

ao sem fios devero consultar o Web site da Linksys em www.linksys.com. 116 117 Passo 1: Ligao do router B. Utilizando um cabo Ethernet, ligue a porta LAN ou Ethernet do modem por cabo ou DSL porta WAN do router. Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas No passo 1, ir ligar o router ao modem por cabo ou DSL e aos computadores de casa ou do escritrio. Primeiro, certifique-se de que todos os dispositivos com que est a trabalhar esto desligados da corrente incluindo os PCs, o modem e o router. A. Se ainda no o fez, ligue o modem por cabo ou DSL ligao adequadaa tomada coaxial para cabo (figura A1) ou a tomada de telefone para DSL (figura A2) (Siga as instrues do manual de instalao do modem por cabo ou DSL.) B C. Ligue um cabo Ethernet ao adap-

tador de Ethernet do PC. Ligue a outra extremidade do cabo a uma das portas LAN do router. Repita este processo para cada PC que pretender ligar ao router. C1 Nota: Se o adaptador de Ethernet do PC no estiver configurado, consulte a documen-

tao do adaptador de Ethernet para obter mais informaes. De modo a facilitar a instalao, comece pela porta LAN 1 do router, utilize em seguida a porta 2, depois a porta 3 e, finalmente, a porta 4. Se pretender ligar mais de quatro PCs ao router, ser necessrio ligar um hub ou switch porta Uplink do router (se utilizar a porta Uplink, no poder utilizar a porta 4). Para obter informaes sobre o Uplink, con-

sulte o manual do utilizador no CD-ROM do assistente de configurao. C2 D. Ligue o adaptador de corrente porta de ali-

mentao do router. Em seguida, ligue o adaptador de corrente a uma tomada elctri-

ca. Ligue o modem por cabo ou DSL. Em seguida, ligue o primeiro PC que pretender uti-

lizar ao configurar o router. Prossiga para o passo 2: Configurao dos PCs, na pgina seguinte. A1 118 A2 119 Passo 2: Configurao dos PCs Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas Se estiver a utilizar:

Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me No passo 2, ir configurar cada um dos computadores para comunicarem com o router. Para tal, ser necessrio configurar as definies de rede do PC de modo a obter um endereo IP (ou TCP/IP) automaticamente. Os computadores utilizam os endereos IP para comunicar uns com os outros atravs de uma rede ou da Internet. Descubra que sistema operativo est a ser executado pelo computador, como Windows 95, 98, Millennium, 2000 ou XP. Ser necessrio saber qual o sistema operativo utilizado pelo computador. Para tal, clique no boto Iniciar e seleccione a opo Definies. (Se o menu Iniciar no tiver uma opo Definies, significa que est a utilizar o Windows XP. pos-

svel seleccionar Painel de controlo directamente a partir do menu Iniciar.) Em seguida, clique em Painel de controlo e faa duplo clique no cone Sistema. Clique no boto Cancelar quando terminar. Depois de saber qual o sistema operativo do Windows a ser executado pelo computador, siga as instrues neste passo adequadas ao seu sistema operativo. Poder ser necessrio repetir este procedimento para todos os computadores que ligar ao router. As pginas que se seguem informam-no, passo a passo, sobre como configurar as definies TCP/IP com base no tipo de sistema operativo do Windows que est a utilizar. Depois de configurar os computadores, prossiga para o passo 3: Configurao do router. A. Clique no boto Iniciar, clique em Definies e abra o Painel de controlo. A partir da, faa duplo clique no cone Rede para abrir o ecr Rede. B. Seleccione o separador Configurao e clique na Linha TCP/IP para o adaptador de Ethernet aplicvel*. Se a palavra TCP/IP aparecer soz-

inha, seleccione essa linha**. Em seguida, clique no boto Propriedades. C. Clique no separador Endereo IP e seleccione Obter automaticamente um endereo IP. D. Clique no separador Gateway e verifique se o campo Gateway instalada est em branco. Clique no boto OK. E. Clique novamente no boto OK. O Windows poder solicitar-lhe o disco de instalao original do Windows ou ficheiros adicionais. Fornea-os apontando a localizao correcta do ficheiro, por exemplo, D:\win98, D:\win9x, c:\windows\options\cabs, etc. (sendo D a letra da unidade de CD-ROM). B C F. Se o Windows lhe perguntar se pretende reiniciar o computador, clique no boto Sim. Se o Windows no lhe solicitar que reinicie o computador, faa-o ainda assim.

*Nota: No escolha uma entrada TCP/IP cujo nome mencione DUN, PPPoE, VPN, ou AOL.

**Nota: Se no existir uma linha TCP/IP listada, consulte o manual do utilizador no CD-ROM do assistente de configurao ou a documentao do adaptador de Ethernet para insta-

lar o TCP/IP. 120 121 Se estiver a utilizar:

Windows 2000 A. Clique no boto Iniciar, clique em Definies e abra o Painel de controlo. A partir da, faa duplo clique no cone Ligaes de acesso tele-

fnico e de rede. Ser apresentado o ecr Rede. B. Seleccione o cone Ligao de rede local para o adaptador de Ethernet* (normalmente, a primeira ligao de rede local listada). Faa duplo clique em Ligao de rede local. C. Quando o ecr Estado da ligao de rede local aparecer, clique no boto Propriedades. C D. Seleccione Protocolo Internet (TCP/IP) e clique no boto Propriedades. E. Seleccione Obter automaticamente um endereo IP e clique no boto OK nos ecrs subsequentes para concluir a configurao do PC. F. Reinicie o computador.

*Nota: No escolha uma entrada TCP/IP cujo nome mencione DUN, PPPoE, VPN, ou AOL. D E Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas Se estiver a utilizar:

Windows XP As instrues que se seguem assumem que est a ser executada a interface predefinida do Windows XP. Se estiver a utilizar a interface clssica (em que os cones e menus se assemelham s verses ante-

riores do Windows), siga as instrues para o Windows 2000. A. Clique no boto Iniciar, abra o Painel de con-

trolo e clique no cone Ligaes de Internet e de rede. Em seguida, clique no cone Ligaes de rede para apresentar o ecr Rede. B. Seleccione o cone Ligao de rede local para o adaptador de Ethernet (normalmente, a primeira ligao de rede local listada). Faa duplo clique em Ligao de rede local. C. Quando o ecr Estado da ligao de rede local aparecer, clique no boto Propriedades. D. Seleccione Protocolo Internet (TCP/IP) e clique no boto Propriedades. E. Seleccione Obter automaticamente um endereo IP e clique no boto OK nos ecrs subsequentes para concluir a configurao do PC. F. Reinicie o computador. C D E 122 123 Passo 3: Configurao do router C. Se for exigido pelo ISP, introduza o nome de anfitrio e o nome de domnio nos campos Host Name e Domain Name, respectivamente, no separador Setup (Configurao).

(Este procedimento normalmente exigido pelos ISPs de cabo.) Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas No passo 3, ir configurar o router para funcionar em rede e obter acesso Internet atravs do seu fornecedor de servios Internet (ISP). O ISP pode requerer o uso de um nome de anfitrio e nome de domnio. Em seguida, ir definir o tipo de configurao WAN no sepa-

rador de configurao do router, a partir das informaes fornecidas pelo ISP. necessrio obter estas informaes de configurao junto do ISP.Se no possuir estas informaes, contacte o ISP antes de prosseguir. Para saber que questes deve colocar ao ISP, consulte a pergunta n. 1 na seco Ajuda. As instrues do ISP informam-no sobre como configurar o PC para acesso Internet. Uma vez que est a utilizar o router para partilhar o acesso Internet entre diversos computa-

dores, estas informaes de configurao sero necessrias para configurar o router. A. Abra o Web browser (no se preocupe se receber uma mensagem de erro nesta altura. Continue a seguir as instrues). Introduza 192.168.1.1 no campo Endereo do Web browser e prima a tecla Enter. A B. Ir aparecer uma janela para introduzir a palavra-passe da rede, mostrada na figura B1.

(Os utilizadores do Windows XP iro ver a janela Ligar a 192.168.1.1, mostrada na figu-

ra B2.). Deixe o campo User Name (Nome de utilizador) vazio e introduza admin (a palavra-passe predefinida), em minsculas, no campo Password. Em seguida, clique no boto OK. B1 124 B2 D. Para configurar o router para a sua rede sem fios, verifique se os campos Wireless (Sem fios) no Setup

(Configurao), apresentados na figura D, esto preenchidos da seguinte forma:

separador Enable/Disable(Activar/desacti-

var): Se seleccionar o boto de opo Enable (Activar), ir acti-

var a funcionalidade sem fios do router. As funes sem fios s estaro disponveis se forem activadas. D SSID: O SSID (ou ESSID) um nome exclusivo para a sua rede sem fios. sensvel a mausculas/minsculas e no pode ultraassar os 32 caracteres. O SSID predefinido linksys mas dever atribuir um nome pessoal rede sem fios. necessrio que todos os pontos na rede sem fios utilizem o mesmo SSID. Channel (Canal): Seleccione o canal apropriado para a sua rede a partir da lista forneci-

da. necessrio que todos os pontos na rede sem fios utilizem o mesmo canal para funcionarem correctamente. NNoottaa:: Se estiver interessado em alterar as definies WEP do router, consulte a seco Configurar a segurana sem fios. E. O router suporta cinco tipos de ligaes: DHCP (obtain an IP automatically) (DHCP, obter automaticamente um endereo IP), PPPoE, Static IP Address (Endereo IP esttico), RAS e PPTP. Estes tipos so seleccionados a partir do menu pendente junto a WAN Connection Type (Tipo de ligao WAN). O ecr de configurao e as funcionalidades disponveis dependem do tipo de ligao seleccionado, apresentando-se em seguida as instrues para cada um deles:

1. Obter automaticamente um endereo IP Se o ISP lhe disser que est a ligar atravs de um endereo IP dinmico (ou DHCP), efectue os seguintes procedimentos:

a. Seleccione Obtain an IP automatically (Obter automaticamente um endereo IP) como tipo de ligao WAN (tal como foi anteriormente mostrado na figura D). b. Clique no boto Apply (Aplicar) para guardar as definies. 125 Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas 4. RAS O RAS um servio utilizado apenas em Singapura. Se estiver a utilizar uma ligao RAS, consulte o seu ISP para obter as informaes de configurao necessrias. 5. PPTP O PPTP um servio utilizado apenas na Europa. Se estiver a utilizar uma ligao PPTP, consulte o seu ISP para obter as informaes de configurao necessrias. 2. IP esttico Se o ISP lhe disser que est a ligar atravs de um endereo IP esttico (ou fixo), efectue os seguintes procedi-

mentos:

a. Seleccione Static IP (IP esttico) como tipo de ligao WAN. c. d. b. Nos campos junto a Specify WAN IP Address (Especificar endereo IP da WAN), introduza o endereo IP. Introduza a Subnet Mask

(Mscara de sub-rede). Introduza o Default Gateway Address (Endereo da gateway predefinida). Introduza o DNS nos campos 1, 2, e/ou 3. necessrio introduzir pelo menos um endereo de DNS. Clique no boto Apply (Aplicar) para guardar as definies. E2 e. f. 3. PPPoE Se o fornecedor de DSL lhe disser que est a ligar atravs de PPPoE ou se cos-

tuma introduzir um nome de utilizador e palavra-passe para aceder Internet, efectue os seguintes procedimentos:

a. Seleccione PPPoE como tipo de b. c. ligao WAN. Introduza o User Name (Nome de utilizador). Introduza a Password (Palavra-

passe). d. Clique no boto Apply (Aplicar) para guardar as definies. e. Clique no separador Status seguido do boto E3

(Estado), Connect (Ligar) para estabelecer a ligao. E5 F. Se ainda no o tiver feito, clique no boto Apply (Aplicar) para guardar as definies. G. Desligue e volte a ligar o modem por cabo ou DSL corrente e reinicie os computa-

dores. Os computadores iro obter as novas definies do router. Nota: S necessrio configurar o router a partir de um computador. Para obter infor-

maes de configurao avanadas, consulte o Web site de suporte da Linksys em sup-

port.linksys.comou o manual do utilizador no CD-ROM do assistente de configurao. Parabns! Concluiu com xito a configurao do router. Pode testar a configurao abrindo o Web browser a partir de qualquer computador e entrando em www.linksys.com/registration. Se no conseguir ir ao nosso Web site, reveja os procedimentos efectuados nesta seco ou consulte a seco de ajuda deste manual de iniciao rpida. 126 127 Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas Ajuda

A seco de ajuda contm as perguntas mais frequentes relacionadas com a ligao Internet. Se tiver necessidades de configurao adicionais ou pretender obter informaes acerca das funcionalidades avanadas, visite kb.linksys.comou consulte o manual do uti-

lizador, que contm um anexo dedicado resoluo de problemas (disponvel no CD-ROM do assistente de configurao). 1. No tenho a certeza sobre as informaes que necessito de obter junto do meu fornecedor de servios Internet (ISP) para colocar a rede a funcionar. Que questes devo colocar?

Se tiver este tipo de ligao:

Dynamic IP Address

(DHCP) (Endereo IP dinmico, DHCP) Static IP Address

(Endereo IP estti-

co) PPPoE Que tipo de ligao tenho: endereo IP dinmico, endereo IP esttico ou PPPoE?

RAS ou PPTP Efectue os seguintes procedimentos:

1. Seleccione Obtain an IP automatically (Obter automatica-

mente um endereo IP) como tipo de ligao WAN . 2. Clique no boto Apply (Aplicar) para guardar as definio. 1. Seleccione Static IP (IP esttico) como tipo de ligao WAN . 2. 3. 4. 5. Introduza o IP Address (Endereo IP). Introduza a Subnet Mask (Mscara de sub-rede). Introduza o Gateway Address (Endereo de gateway). Inrroduza o DNS nos campos 1, 2, e/ou 3. necessrio intro-

duzir pelo menos um endereo de DNS. 6. Clique no boto Apply (Aplicar) para guardar as definio. 1. Seleccione PPPoE como tipo de ligao WAN . Introduza o User Name (Nome de utilizador). 2. Introduza a Password (Palavra-passe). 3. 4. Clique no boto Apply (Aplicar) para guardar as definio. Se estiver a utilizar RAS (SingTel na Singapura) ou PPTP (servio na Europa), consulte o seu ISP para obter as informaes de con-

figurao necessrias.

Se estiver a utilizar um endereo IP dinmico, devo perguntar:

Qual o meu nome de anfitrio (se necessrio)?

Qual o meu nome de domnio (se necessrio)?

Se estiver a utilizar um endereo IP esttico, devo perguntar:

Qual o meu endereo IP?

Qual a minha gateway?

Qual o meu DNS?

Se estiver a utilizar PPPoE (tipicamente utilizado por ISPs de DSL), devo perguntar:

Qual o meu nome de utilizador?

Qual a minha palavra-passe?

Depois de obter as informaes, siga as instrues indicadas no passo 3 do manual de ini-

ciao rpida, Configurao do router, e introduza estas informaes no separador Setup

(Configurao). Na seco WAN Connection Type (Tipo de ligao WAN), consulte o grfico na pgina seguinte:

2. Estou a ter problemas para ligar Internet. Que LEDs devem acender na parte da frente do router?

Cada LED do router ir acender por cada ligao bem estabelecida na parte de trs do routerquer seja um cabo Ethernet ou um cabo de alimentao. Por exemplo, os seguintes LEDs acendem quando se liga um computador e um modem por cabo ou DSL:

Quando o router ligado (o adaptador de corrente est ligado ao router), o LED Poweracende. Quando um cabo Ethernet correctamente ligado entre um PC e a porta 4 do router, os LEDs Link/Act, Ful/Cole 100na coluna 4 acendem. A ligao de um modem por cabo ou DSL faz com que o LED WAN Linkacenda. 128 129 Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas

O LED WAN Linkno est aceso. O que devo verificar?

Verifique se o cabo que est a usar entre o modem por cabo ou DSL e o router o que foi fornecido com o modem. Consoante o tipo de ligao utilizada pelo modem, poder necessitar de um cabo Ethernet directo (straight-through) ou cruzado (crossover). O tipo directo o mais comum. Algumas das luzes na parte da frente do router no acendem quando eu ligo um PC.

Apenas o LED Link/Act necessrio para que uma ligao funcione correcta-

mente. 3. No consigo aceder Internet nem pgina de configurao do router. O que devo veri-ficar?

A. Em primeiro lugar, verifique se o modem por cabo ou DSL e os computadores esto cor-

rectamente ligados ao router. Consulte a pergunta n. 2 para obter informaes sobre como verificar se as ligaes esto correctas. B. Em seguida, verifique se configurou correctamente os PCs para comunicarem com o router. Abaixo poder encontrar instrues referentes s diversas verses do Windows.

- Windows 95, 98 ou ME

Clique no menu Iniciar e, em seguida, clique em Executar. Quando aparecer a janela Executar, introduza winipcfg no campo Abrir e, em seguida, clique no boto OK. Quando aparecer a janela Configurao IP, clique na caixa cinzenta com uma seta preta a apontar para baixo. Ir aparecer uma lista de adaptadores. Seleccione o adaptador que utiliza para se ligar Internet. Estes itens no devem conter PPP, VPN, AOL ou Adaptador de acesso telefnico como parte da entrada. O campo Emdereo IP deve mostrar 192.168.1.100 ou 192.168.1.xxx, sendo xxx qualquer nmero superior a 100. Se o seu endereo IP no estiver dentro desse intervalo, mantenha o boto Reset na parte da frente do router premido durante mais de 30 segundos. Isto far com as predefinies de fbrica sejam repostas, de forma que ser necessrio voltar a configurar a pgina de configu-

rao do router. Depois de configurar novamente a pgina de configurao, reini-

cie o computador.

- Windows NT, 2000 e XP

Clique no menu Iniciar e, em seguida, clique em Executar. Quando aparecer a janela Executar, introduza cmd no campo Abrir e, em seguida, clique no boto OK. Ir aparecer uma linha de comandos. Introduza ipconfig /all e, em seguida, prima a tecla Enter.

O campo Endereo IP deve mostrar 192.168.1.100 ou 192.168.1.xxx, sendo xxx qualquer nmero superior a 100. Se o seu endereo IP no estiver dentro desse intervalo, mantenha o boto Reset na parte da frente do router premido durante mais de 30 segundos. Isto far com as predefinies de fbrica sejam repostas, de forma que ser necessrio voltar a configurar a pgina de configu-

rao do router. Depois de configurar novamente a pgina de configurao, reini-

cie o computador. C. Em seguida, ir configurar algumas definies em Windows.

- No ambiente de trabalho, faa duplo clique em O meu computador e, em seguida, faa duplo clique em Painel de controlo (Os utilizadores do Windows XP com a interface predefinida devem clicar em Iniciar e seleccionar Painel de controlo).

- Quando a janela do painel de controlo aparecer, faa duplo clique no cone Opes da Internet (os utilizadores do Windows XP com a interface predefinida devem clicar em Ligaes de Internet e de rede e, em seguida, em Opes da Internet).

- Quando a janela Opes da Internet aparecer, clique no separador Ligaes.

- Seleccione Nunca estabelecer uma ligao (est tudo bem se esta opo no estiv-

er disponvel).

- Clique no boto Definies da rede local no canto inferior direito.

- Quando a janela Definies da rede local aparecer, desmarque todas as caixas.

- Clique no boto OK e no boto Aplicar (o boto Aplicar no poder ser seleccionado se no tiver efectuado nenhuma alterao). Em seguida, clique no boto OK novamente.

- Saia do painel de controlo e reinicie o computador. 4. Quando clico no cone para aceder Internet e introduzo o nome de utilizador e palavra-passe fornecidos pelo ISP, no consigo estabelecer uma ligao Internet. O que se passa?

Se isto acontecer, significa que est a utilizar o software fornecido pelo seu ISP. Utilize o Internet Explorer ou o Netscape Navigator, localizados no ambiente de trabalho (ou no menu Iniciar no Windows XP). 5. Quando utilizo o Internet Explorer, aparece uma caixa a solicitar que estabelea uma ligao de acesso telefnico. Como posso desactivar essa opo?

A. No ambiente de trabalho, faa duplo clique em O meu computador e, em seguida, faa duplo clique em Painel de controlo (Os utilizadores do Windows XP com a interface predefinida devem clicar em Iniciar e seleccionar Painel de controlo). B. Quando a janela do painel de controlo aparecer, faa duplo clique no cone Opes da Internet (os utilizadores do Windows XP com a interface predefinida devem clicar em Ligaes de Internet e de redee, em seguida, em Opes da Internet). C. Quando a janela Opes da Internet aparecer, clique no separador Ligaes. 130 131 Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas D. Seleccione Nunca estabelecer uma ligao. E. Clique no boto Aplicar. F. Clique no boto OK. 6. No obtenho intensidade do sinal nem qualidade da ligao. O que posso fazer?

A. Verifique se o LED WLAN do router est iluminado. B. Verifique se todos os PCs sem fios esto a utilizar o modo Infrastructure. 7. Como posso aumentar a amplitude do router?

A. Coloque o router to elevado do cho quanto possvel. B. Verifique se no existem fontes de interferncia elctrica significativa nas proximi-

dades. (Por exemplo: caixas de altifalantes, luzes fluorescentes, microondas, etc.) C. Mude o canal sem fios utilizado. Para o fazer:

Abra o Web browser e escreva http://192.168.1.1 no campo Endereo. Na caixa Enter Network Password (Introduzir palavra-passe da rede), deixe o campo do nome de utilizador em branco e escreva a palavra-passe admin. Em seguida, clique em OK. No separador Setup (Configurao), mude o canal para 1. Clique no boto Apply (Aplicar) para guardar as definies. Continue a efectuar este procedimento at encontrar o canal que fornea a maior amplitude. Configurar a segurana sem fios Nota: A encriptao WEP uma medida adicional de segurana de dados no essencial para o funcionamento do router. Sendo um acrnimo para privacidade equivalente com fios (WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy), este constitui um mtodo de encriptao utilizado para proteger as comuni-

caes de dados sem fios. A WEP utiliza uma combinao de chaves de 64 ou 128 bits para proporcionar o controlo do acesso sua rede e segurana de encriptao para todas as transmisses de dados. Para descodificar uma transmisso de dados, cada ponto na rede tem de utilizar uma chave de 64 ou 128 bits idntica. Nveis de encriptao supe-

riores significam maiores nveis de segurana, mas devido complexidade da encrip-

tao, podem tambm significar uma diminuio no desempenho da rede. Tambm poder ter ouvido falar no termo 40 bits utilizado em associao com encrip-

tao WEP . Este outro termo para encriptao WEP de 64 bits . Este nvel de encrip-

tao WEP foi apelidado de 40 bits porque utiliza uma chave secreta de 40 bits junta-

mente com um vector de inicializao de 24 bits (40 + 24 = 64). Os fornecedores de equipamento sem fios podero usar qualquer um dos nomes. A Linksys utiliza o termo 64 bits para se referir a este nvel de encriptao. Certifique-se de que a rede sem fios est a funcionar antes de tentar configurar a encrip-

tao WEP. Uma rede sem fios com encriptao WEP de 128 bits NO comunicar com uma rede sem fios com encriptao WEP de 64 bits. Por isso, certifique-se de que todos os dis-

positivos sem fios utilizam o mesmo nvel de encriptao. Todos os dispositivos sem fios em conformidade com a norma 802.11b suportam WEP de 64 bits. Para alm da activao da WEP, a Linksys tambm recomenda a implementao das seguintes medidas de segurana:

Alterao do SSID cujo valor predefinido linksys

Alterao regular da chave WEP Nota: Para activar a encriptao WEP, necessrio activar, em primeiro lugar, as funes sem fios. Seleccione Enable (Activar) no separador Wireless

(Sem fios) antes de prosseguir. 132 133 Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas Os passos que se seguem iro mostrar como utilizar a encriptao WEP 1. A partir do separador Setup (Configurao) do utilitrio baseado na Web, selec-

cione Mandatory (Obrigatrio) na seco WEP. 2. Prima o boto WEP Key Setting (Definio da chave WEP) para definir o tipo e o nvel da encriptao WEP. 3. Poder aparecer o ecr apresentado na figura C-1, a confir-

mar se pretende acti-

var a encriptao WEP. Prima o boto OK para continuar. 4. Em seguida, ser apresentado o ecr mostrado na figura C-2. A partir daqui, poder escolher as suas definies de encriptao WEP. Figura C-1

WEP (64B ou 128B) Seleccione o nvel de encriptao a partir da caixa pendente. A encriptao WEP de 128 bits exclusiva da Linksys e pode entrar em conflito com a encriptao WEP de outros fornecedores. Nota: Para utilizar a encriptao WEP, todos os pontos na rede sem fios tm de ter a WEP activada e possuir a mesma definio de chave. A chave de encriptao WEP gerada de uma das seguintes formas:

1. O utilizador pode criar uma chave de encriptao utilizando uma Passphrase (Frase-

passe). a. Introduza uma frase-passe, uma palavra-passe definida pelo utilizador, no campo Passphrase. A frase-passe pode conter at 31 letras, smbolos e nmeros. No possvel utilizar espaos. b. Clique no boto Generate (Gerar) para criar uma chave. A chave ter 10 dgitos, se escolher encriptao de 64 bits ou 26 dgitos, se escolher encriptao de 128 bits. Esta chave ser utilizada para encriptar e desencriptar os dados enviados entre o router e os PCs sem fios da rede. O campo Key (Chave) pode no apresentar todos os dgitos. Com o rato, clique em qualquer parte no campo Key (Chave). Mova o cursor para a direita para ver o resto da chave. Certifique-se de que escreve toda a chave EXACTA-

MENTE da forma como mostrada. 2. Pode introduzir a chave de encriptao manualmente. Tome nota da frase-passe ou chave manual. Ela ser necessria para os outros disposi-

tivos sem fios da rede, uma vez que todos tm de possuir a mesma chave de encriptao WEP. Uma vez escolhido o mtodo da chave de encriptao e introduzida a frase-passe ou chave manual, clique no boto Apply (Aplicar) para concluir a parte do processo de configurao destinada encriptao. Nota: No Windows XP, uma chave de 128 bits gerada pelo router ser designada por chave de 104 bits (26 dgitos) e uma chave de 64 bits gerada pelo router ser designada por chave de 40 bits (10 dgitos) . Figura C-2 134 135 Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas Configurar a segurana sem fios no Windows XP Uma vez que o Windows XP no permite o uso da funcionalidade da frase-passe da Linksys com os adaptadores sem fios, ser necessrio introduzir manualmente a chave gerada na seco anterior. Os seguintes procedimentos iro ajud-lo a activar a WEP e introduzir manualmente a chave de encriptao para as placas PC Card sem fios, permitindo que o sistema Windows XP comunique com o router sem fios. Estes procedimentos assumem que a letra da unidade de CD-ROM D e que o Windows XP est a ser executado no modo predefinido. Certifique-se de que possui a chave WEP gerada pelo router. 1. Tal como mostrado na figura C-3, clique no boto Iniciar e v para o Painel de controlo. 2. Na janela do painel de controlo, clique no cone Ligaes de Internet e de rede mostrado na figura C-4. 3. Clique no cone Ligaes de rede mostrado na figura C-5. Figura C-4 Figura C-3 Figura C-5 4. A janela Ligaes de rede ir aparecer, tal como mostrado na figura C-6. Em LAN ou Internet de alta velocidade, poder ver todas as placas de rede instaladas e a funcionar no computador. Faa duplo clique no cone Ligao de rede sem fios associado ao seu adaptador sem fios. Se a janela Estado da ligao de rede sem fios aparecer, prossiga para o passo seguinte. 136 137 Srie Instant Wireless Router de ponto de acesso sem fios com switch de 4 portas Se aparecer uma janela Ligar rede sem fios na seco Redes disponveis, clique na rede sem fios pretendida especificada pelo SSID do router. Em seguida, faa duplo clique no cone Ligao de rede sem fios. 6. Quando a janela Propri-

edades da ligao de rede sem fios aparecer, tal como mostrado na figura C-8, clique no separador Redes sem fios. 5. Quando a janela Estado da ligao de rede sem fios aparecer, tal como mostra-

do na figura C-7, clique no boto Propriedades. Figura C-6 Figura C-8 fios 7. Se for apresentada a rede sem apropriada, especificada pelo SSID do router, na seco Redes preferidas, tal como mostrado na figura C-9, faa duplo clique na mesma e prossiga para o passo seguinte. Caso contrrio, clique na rede sem fios apropriada, especificada pelo SSID do router, na seco Redes disponveis. Em seguida, clique boto Configurar. no Figura C-7 138 Figura C-9 139 Srie Instant Wireless 8. Ir aparecer a janela Propriedades da rede sem fios (mostrada na figura C-10). Marque a opo Encriptao de dados (WEP activada), na caixa de verificao. Desmarque os campos Autenticao de rede (modo partilhado) e Chave forneci-

da automaticamente. No campo Chave de rede, introduza a chave tal e qual como foi gerada pelo router

(os 10 ou 26 dgitos, consoante o nvel de encriptao). Verifique se o campo Formato da chave apresenta Dgitos hexadecimais e se o campo Comprimento da chave apresenta 40 bits (10 dgitos) ou 104 bits (26 dgitos). Se assim no for, significa que a chave foi introduzida incorrectamente. Figura C-10 Clique no boto OK para guardar as definies. Clique nos botes OK at chegar janela Estado da ligao de rede sem fios. Feche todas as janelas abertas para regressar ao ambiente de trabalho do Windows XP. Feche todas as aplicaes e reinicie o computador. Depois de reiniciar, a configurao WEP concluda e dever ser possvel estabelecer uma ligao sem fios ao router. 140 141 COPYRIGHT Y MARCAS COMERCIALES. Copyright 2002 Linksys. Todos los derechos reservados. Instant Wireless es una marca comercial de Linksys. Microsoft, Windows y el logotipo de Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation. Las dems marcas comerciales y nombres de productos pertenecen a sus respectivos propietarios. NORMATIVA DE LA FCC. El ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con switch de 4 puertos Instant Wireless ha sido probado y cumple las especificaciones de la Clase B para disposi-

tivos digitales, con arreglo a la Seccin 15 de la normativa de la FCC. Estas normas estn diseadas para proporcionar una proteccin razonable contra interferencias per-

judiciales en instalaciones residenciales. Este equipo genera, utiliza y puede emitir energa radioelctrica. Si no se instala y utiliza segn las instrucciones, podra causar interferencias perjudiciales en las comunicaciones por radio. No obstante, no se garan-

tiza que no se produzcan interferencias en una instalacin concreta. Si este equipo lle-

gara a producir interferencias perjudiciales para la recepcin de radio o televisin, detectadas al encender y apagar el equipo, se recomienda tomar las medidas sigu-

ientes para corregirlas:

Reoriente o cambie la ubicacin de la antena receptora

Aumente la distancia entre los equipos o los dispositivos

Conecte el equipo a un enchufe distinto al del receptor

Consulte a un distribuidor o tcnico especializado de radio y TV ndice de materias Introduccin Paso 1: Conexin del ruteador Paso 2: Configuracin de los PC Paso 3: Configuracin del ruteador Ayuda 144 146 148 152 156 Configuracin de la seguridad inalmbrica 161 Configuracin de la seguridad inalmbrica en Windows XP 164 Si necesita asistencia tcnica sobre los productos, pngase en contacto con nosotros en las direcciones siguientes:

correo electrnico Web europe-support@linksys.com latam-soporte@linksys.com http://www.linksys.com/international 142 143 Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con conmutador de 4 puertos Introduccin Gracias por elegir el ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con switch de 4 puertos Instant Wireless. Este ruteador le permitir configurar una red en su PC y, adems, compartir la conexin a Internet. Cmo consigue el ruteador hacer todo esto? Al conectar un mdem por cable o DSL al ruteador y los PC a los puertos Ethernet de ste, cada PC queda configurado como si estu-

viera conectado directamente a Internet. De este modo, varios PC pueden compartir simultneamente una conexin a Internet. Adems, puesto que tambin es Access Point

(punto de acceso), el ruteador puede conectar la red Ethernet a los equipos inalmbricos. Qu significa?

Las redes son herramientas muy tiles para compartir recursos. Permiten el acceso a una impresora desde varios equipos o a los datos localizados en el disco duro de otros equipos. Las redes tambin se utilizan para compartir videojuegos entre varios participantes. Por lo tanto, no slo son tiles para los hogares y las oficinas, sino que tambin pueden propor-

cionar diversin. Los PC conectados a los cuatro puertos LAN del ruteador y configurados correctamente for-

man una LAN o red de rea local. Se comunican mediante un cable Ethernet conectado al adaptador Ethernet del equipo y a los puertos LAN del ruteador (numerados del uno al cua-

tro). Se utiliza la expresin Ethernet para referirse a los accesorios de la red, como cables y adaptadores, ya que el tipo de red que va a configurar es Ethernet. En la documentacin del ruteador, Ethernet se refiere a los accesorios que transfieren datos informticos entre 10 Mbps y 100 Mbps. (10 Mbps y 100 Mbps son las velocidades de transmisin de los dis-

positivos de la red. Una velocidad de transferencia de datos de 10 Mbps equivale a trans-

ferir siete disquetes por segundo. Los accesorios de red que funcionan a 100 Mbps trans-

fieren los datos diez veces ms rpido) Los PC tambin pueden interactuar con el ruteador mediante conexiones inalmbricas. Al configurar los PC inalmbricos con los mismos parmetros que el ruteador, es posible inter-

conectarlos e integrarlos en la red Ethernet existente. Quiz, la funcin ms importante del ruteador es la que permite compartir la conexin por cable o DSL. Se consigue conectando el mdem por cable o DSL al puerto WAN del ruteador con un cable Ethernet. (WAN son las siglas en ingls de Red de rea extensa.) Internet es una red global que cubre el rea ms extensa. Los PC conectados al ruteador comparten esta conexin. 144 Siga las instrucciones de esta Gua rpida para conectar el ruteador y configurar los PC y el ruteador en la red. En estas instrucciones se explican todos los pasos necesarios para con-

figurar y poner en marcha una red normal y compartir el acceso a Internet. El ruteador dispone tambin de otras funciones ms avanzadas, no obstante, no debern utilizarse hasta no tener un conocimiento ms amplio de ruteadores y redes. Estos temas y otros se tratan en el Manual del usuario del CD-ROM del Asistente para instalacin. Descripcin de la configuracin La configuracin del ruteador para cualquier PC Windows es similar a la figura mostrada arri-

ba. El ruteador permite compartir la conexin de un mdem por cable o DSL con varios equipos en casa en la oficina. Este tipo de conexin se denomina Red de rea local o LAN. En esta Gua rpida encontrar una descripcin general de todos los pasos necesarios para configurar una red normal en su casa o en la oficina. En los tres apartados siguientes se expli-

ca cmo conectar y configurar los equipos para que utilicen un acceso compartido de alta velocidad a Internet. Paso 1: Conexin del ruteador En este paso se describe el proceso de conexin del ruteador al mdem por cable o DSL. A continuacin, se muestra cmo conectar los PC al ruteador. Paso 2: Configuracin de los PC En este paso se explica cmo configurar los PC para que puedan comunicarse con el ruteador. Paso 3: Configuracin del ruteador En este paso se muestran los ajustes que hay que realizar en el ruteador para que pueda conectarse con el mdem por cable o DSL utilizando la informacin de su ISP. NNoottaa::En esta Gua rpida se explica cmo configurar el ruteador con cables Ethernet. Aunque el ruteador puede configurarse para una conexin inalmbrica, en esta Gua rpida no se incluyen los detalles para este tipo de conexin. Si desea configurar el ruteador para una conexin inalmbrica, visite el sitio Web de Linksys en la direccin www.linksys.com. 145 Paso 1: Conexin del ruteador B. Con un cable Ethernet, conecte el puerto LAN o Ethernet del mdem por cable o DSL al puerto WAN del ruteador. Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con switch de 4 puertos En el Paso 1, conectar el ruteador al mdem por cable o DSL y a los equipos de su casa u oficina. Compruebe que todos los dispositivos que va a utilizar estn apagados, incluidos los PC, el mdem y el ruteador. A. Conecte el mdem por cable o DSL a su toma correspondiente: la toma coaxial para el mdem por cable (Figura A1) o la toma de telfono para el mdem DSL (Figura A2). (Siga las instrucciones del manual de instalacin de los mdems.) B C. Conecte un cable Ethernet al adaptador Ethernet del PC. Conecte el otro extremo del cable a uno de los puertos LAN del ruteador. Repita este proceso con cada PC que desee conectar al ruteador. C1 Nota: Si no est configurado el adaptador Ethernet del PC, consulte las instrucciones en la documentacin del adaptador Ethernet. Para facilitar la instalacin, utilice los puertos LAN del ruteador en orden consecutivo de menor a mayor, primero el 1, luego el 2 y as sucesivamente. Si va a conectar ms de cuatro PC, deber conectar un hub o un switch al puerto Uplink del ruteador (si utiliza el puerto Uplink, debe dejar libre el Puerto 4). Para obtener ms informacin sobre cmo usar el puerto Uplink, consulte el Manual del usuario del CD-ROM del Asistente para instalacin. C2 D. Conecte el cable de alimentacin a la toma de corriente del ruteador. A continuacin, conecte el enchufe a una toma de corriente. Encienda el mdem por cable o DSL y el primer PC que va a configurar en el ruteador. Contine con el Paso 2: Configuracin de los PC en la pgina siguiente. A1 146 A2 147 Paso 2: Configuracin de los PC Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con switch de 4 puertos Para los sistemas operativos:

Windows 95, Windows 98 y Windows Me A. Haga clic en el botn elija Configuracin y abra el Panel de control. En el Panel de control, haga doble clic en el icono Red para abrir el cuadro de dilogo Red. Inicio, En el Paso 2, se configuran los PC para su comunicacin con el ruteador. Para ello, deber configurar los parmetros de la red de PC de forma que obtengan las direcciones IP (o TCP/IP) automticamente. Los equipos utilizan las direcciones IP para comunicarse entre s a travs de una red o de Internet. Averige qu sistema operativo utiliza su equipo, por ejemplo, Windows 95, 98, Millennium, 2000 o XP. Esta comprobacin es necesaria. Puede averiguarlo haciendo clic en el botn Inicio y eligiendo la opcin Configuracin. (Si en el men Inicio no aparece la opcin Configuracin, est utilizando Windows XP. Puede abrir el Panel de control directamente desde el men Inicio.) A continuacin, haga clic en Panel de control y haga doble clic en el icono Sistema. Cuando termine, haga clic en el botn Cancelar. Despus de comprobar la versin del sistema operativo Windows, siga las instrucciones de este paso para el sistema que corresponda a su equipo. Si es preciso, repita estos pasos para cada equipo que vaya a conectar al ruteador. En las pginas siguientes se describe paso a paso cmo configurar los parmetros TCP/IP para los distintos tipos de sistemas operativos Windows. Despus de configurar los equipos, vaya al Paso 3: Configuracin del ruteador. B. En la ficha Configuracin, seleccione la lnea TCP/IP del adaptador Ethernet correspondien-

te*. Si aparece nicamente TCP/IP, seleccione esta lnea**. A continuacin, haga clic en el botn Propiedades. B C. Haga clic en la ficha Direccin IP y seleccione Obtener una direccin IP automticamente. D. Haga clic en la ficha Puerta de enlace y com-

pruebe que el campo Puertas de enlace insta-

ladas est vaco. Haga clic en el botn Aceptar. E. Vuelva a hacer clic en el botn Aceptar. Es posible que Windows le pida el disco de insta-

lacin original u otros archivos adicionales. Cuando se le pida, indique la ubicacin correc-

ta de los archivos, p. ej., D:\win98, D:\win9x, c:\windows\options\cabs, etc. (Se presupone que D es la letra correspondiente a la unidad de CD-ROM). C F Si Windows solicita que reinicie el equipo, haga clic en el botn S. Reinicie el equipo de todas formas aunque el programa no lo pida.

*Nota: no seleccione las lneas TCP/IP donde se indique DUN, PPPoE, VPN o AOL.

**Nota: si no aparece TCP/IP en ninguna lnea, consulte el Manual del usuario del CD-ROM del Asistente para instalacin de la documentacin del adaptador Ethernet e instale el protocolo TCP/IP. 148 149 Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con switch de 4 puertos Para el sistema operativo:

Windows 2000 A. Haga clic en el botn Inicio, elija Configuracin y abra el Panel de control. En el Panel de con-

trol, haga doble clic en el icono Conexiones de red y de acceso telefnico. Se abre el cuadro de dilogo Red. B. Seleccione el icono Conexin de rea local correspondiente a su adaptador Ethernet* (nor-

malmente, la primera conexin de rea local de la lista). Haga doble clic en Conexin de rea local. C. En la pantalla de estado que aparece, haga clic en el botn Propiedades. D. Seleccione Protocolo de Internet (TCP/IP) y haga clic en el botn Propiedades. E. Seleccione Obtener una direccin IP automticamente y haga clic en el botn Aceptar de las siguientes pantallas hasta com-

pletar la configuracin del PC. F Reinicie el equipo.

*Nota: no seleccione las lneas TCP/IP donde se indique DUN, PPPoE, VPN o AOL. C D E Para el sistema operativo:

Windows XP Las siguientes instrucciones se refieren nicamente a la interfaz predeterminada de Windows XP. Si uti-

liza la interfaz Clsica (que muestra los iconos y los mens parecidos a las versiones anteriores de Windows), siga las instrucciones para Windows 2000. A. Haga clic en el botn Inicio, abra el Panel de control y haga clic en el icono Conexiones de red e Internet. A continuacin, haga clic en el icono Conexiones de red para abrir la pantalla Red. C B. Seleccione el icono Conexin de rea local correspondiente a su adaptador Ethernet (normal-

mente, la primera conexin de rea local de la lista). Haga doble clic en Conexin de rea local. C. En la pantalla de estado que aparece, haga clic en el botn Propiedades. D. Seleccione Protocolo de Internet (TCP/IP) y haga clic en el botn Propiedades. E. Seleccione Obtener una direccin IP automticamente y haga clic en el botn Aceptar de las siguientes pantallas hasta com-

pletar la configuracin del PC. D F Reinicie el equipo. E 150 151 Paso 3: Configuracin del ruteador Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con switch de 4 puertos C. Si su ISP lo requiere, escriba el Nombre de host y el Nombre de dominio del ruteador en los campos correspondientes de la ficha de configuracin. (Normalmente, estos datos son necesarios para los ISP de conexin por cable.) En el Paso 3, configurar el ruteador para su funcionamiento en la red y para obtener acce-

so a Internet mediante un Proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP). Es posible que su ISP le pida que utilice un Nombre de host y un Nombre de dominio. A continuacin, definir el tipo de configuracin WAN en la ficha de configuracin de ruteador con los datos obtenidos de su ISP. Estos datos son necesarios.Si no los tiene, consulte a su ISP antes de continuar. Para saber qu datos necesita obtener de su ISP, consulte la pregunta n 1 de la Ayuda. El ISP le proporcionar las instrucciones para configurar el acceso a Internet desde su PC. Puesto que se va a utilizar para compartir el acceso a Internet entre varios equipos, tam-

bin deber utilizar esta informacin para la configuracin del ruteador. A. Abra el navegador Web. (Es posible que aparezca algn mensaje de error en este momento. Contine con las siguientes instrucciones) Escriba 192.168.1.1 en el campo Direccin del navegador y pulse la tecla Entrar. A B. Aparece el cuadro de dilogo Escribir contrasea de red, como muestra la Figura B1.

(Los usuarios de Windows XP vern la ventana Conectar con 192.168.1.1, que muestra la Figura B2.) Deje vaco el campo Nombre de usuario y escriba en minsculas admin

(la contrasea predeterminada) en el campo Contrasea. A continuacin, haga clic en el botn Aceptar. B1 152 B2 los D. Para configurar el ruteador para una red inalmbrica, compruebe que campos Wireless

(Inalmbrico) de la ficha Setup

(Configuracin), que muestra la Figura D, se han completado como sigue:

E n a b l e / D i s a b l e

(Activar/desactivar): Al selec-

cionar el botn de opcin Enable

(Activar) se activan las fun-

ciones del ruteador. Estas funciones no estarn disponibles si no se selecciona este botn. inalmbricas D SSID: SSID (o ESSID) es un nombre exclusivo para la red inalmbrica. El nombre dis-

tingue entre maysculas y minsculas y no debe superar los 32 caracteres. El SSID pre-

determinado es linksys , pero se recomienda cambiarlo por un nombre ms descrip-

tivo de la red inalmbrica. Todos los puntos de la red inalmbrica deben utilizar el mismo SSID. Channel (Canal): Seleccione en la lista el canal apropiado de la red. Todos los puntos de la red inalmbrica deben usar el mismo canal para funcionar correctamente. NNoottaa:: Si desea modificar la configuracin WEP del ruteador, elija Configuracin de la seguridad inalmbrica. E. El ruteador admite cinco tipos de conexiones: DHCP (obtener una direccin IP automti-

camente), PPPoE, Direccin IP esttica, RAS y PPTP. Estos tipos se seleccionan en el men desplegable que aparece junto a WAN Connection Type (Tipo de conexin WAN). La pantalla de configuracin y las distintas caractersticas varan segn el tipo de conexin seleccionado. Vea las instrucciones a continuacin:

1. Obtener una direccin IP automticamente Si el ISP le indica que su conexin es a travs de una direccin IP dinmica (o DHCP), siga estos pasos:

a. Seleccione Obtener una direccin IP automticamente en el Tipo de conexin WAN

(como se muestra en la Figura D). b. Haga clic en el botn Apply (Aplicar) para guardar la configuracin. 153 Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con conmutador de 4 puertos 4. RAS El servicio RAS se utiliza nicamente en Singapur. Si utiliza una conexin RAS, solicite a su ISP los datos necesarios para la configuracin. 5. PPTP El servicio PPTP se utiliza nica-

mente en Europa. Si utiliza una conexin PPTP, solicite a su ISP los datos necesarios para la con-

figuracin. 2. Static IP (IP esttica) Si el ISP le indica que su conexin es a travs de una direccin IP esttica (o fija), siga estos pasos:

a. Seleccione Static IP en WAN Connection Type (Tipo de conexin WAN) . b. En los campos que aparecen junto a Specify WAN IP Address, escriba la Direccin IP. c. Escriba la Mscara de subred. d. Escriba la Direccin de la puerta de enlace predeterminada. e. Escriba el DNS en los campos 1, 2 y 3. Debe indicar al menos una direccin de servidor DNS. E2 f. Haga clic en el botn Apply (Aplicar) para guardar la configuracin. E5 3. PPPoE Si su proveedor de DSL le indica que utiliza una conexin PPPoE, o si escribe normalmente un nombre de usuario y una contrasea para conec-

tarse a Internet, siga estos pasos:

a. Seleccione PPPoE como Tipo de conexin Wan (WAN Connection Type). b. Escriba el Nombre de usuario. c. Escriba la Contrasea. d. Haga clic en el botn Apply

(Aplicar) para guardar la configu-

racin. E3 F Haga clic en el botn Apply (Aplicar) para guardar la configuracin. G. Conecte el mdem por cable o DSL y reinicie los equipos. Se cargan los nuevos valores del ruteador. Nota: slo necesita configurar el ruteador para un equipo. Si desea consultar la informacin avanzada, visite el sitio Web de asistencia tcnica de Linksys en la direccin support.linksys.como vea el Manual del usuario en el CD-ROM del Asistente para instalacin. Ha completado la configuracin del ruteador. Para probar su funcionamiento, abra el navegador Web en cualquier equipo y escriba www.linksys.com/registration. Si no puede abrir nuestra pgina Web, vuelva a comprobar los pasos que ha realizado anteriormente o consulte la seccin de ayuda de este manual. e. Haga clic en la ficha Status (Estado) y, a continuacin, en el botn Connect (Conectar) para iniciar la conexin. 154 155 Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con conmutador de 4 puertos Ayuda

Si tiene este tipo de conexin:

Direccin IP dinmica (DHCP) Direccin IP esttica En la seccin de ayuda puede encontrar las preguntas ms frecuentes sobre la conexin a Internet. Si necesita ms informacin sobre la configuracin o sobre las funciones avan-

zadas, visite kb.linksys.como consulte el apndice de solucin de problemas en el Manual del usuario del CD-ROM del Asistente para instalacin. 1. No conozco los datos que debo obtener del Proveedor de servicios de Internet

(ISP) para poner la red en funcionamiento. Qu preguntas tengo que hacer?

PPPoE Cul es el tipo de conexin: direccin IP dinmica, direccin IP esttica o PPPoE Siga estos pasos:

1. Seleccione Obtener una direccin IP automticamente en el Tipo de conexin WAN . 2. Haga clic en el botn Apply (Aplicar) para guardar la configu-

racin. 1. Seleccione Static IP (IP esttica) en el Tipo de conexin WAN . 2. Escriba la Direccin IP. 3. Escriba la Mscara de subred. 4. Escriba la Direccin de la puerta de enlace. 5. Escriba el DNS en los campos 1, 2 y 3. Debe indicar al menos una direccin DNS. 6. Haga clic en el botn Apply (Aplicar) para guardar la configu-

racin. 1. Seleccione PPPoE en el Tipo de conexin WAN . 2. Escriba el Nombre de usuario. 3. Escriba la Contrasea. 4. Haga clic en el botn Apply (Aplicar) para guardar la configu-

racin.

Si utiliza una direccin IP dinmica, deber averiguar:

El nombre del host (si procede) El nombre de dominio (si procede) Si utiliza una direccin IP esttica, deber averiguar:

La direccin IP La pasarela El DNS Si utiliza PPPoE (lo utilizan normalmente los ISP de DSL), deber averiguar:

El nombre de usuario La contrasea Cuando tenga la informacin, siga las instrucciones del apartado Inicio rpido - Paso 3:

Configuracin del ruteador. Utilice esta informacin para rellenar la ficha Setup

(Configuracin) al configurar el ruteador. Para la seccin WAN Connection Type (Tipo de conexin WAN) consulte el grfico de la pgina siguiente:

RAS o PPTP Si utiliza RAS (SingTel de Singapur) o PPTP (servicio para Europa), consulte a su ISP los datos necesarios para la instalacin. 2. Tengo problemas para conectar a Internet. Que indicadores tienen que estar encendidos en la parte frontal del ruteador?

Por cada equipo conectado correctamente en la parte posterior del ruteador deber encenderse un indicador, independientemente de si se utiliza un cable Ethernet o uno de alimentacin. Por ejemplo, normalmente, al conectar un equipo y un mdem por cable o DSL se encienden los siguientes indicadores:

Al encender el ruteador (el adaptador de alimentacin conectado al ruteador), se enciende el indicador Power. Al conectar correctamente un cable Ethernet a un PC y al Puerto 4 del ruteador, se encienden los indicadores Link/Act, Ful/Col y 100 de la Columna 4. Al conectar un mdem por cable o DSL, se enciende el indicador WAN Link. 156 157 Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con conmutador de 4 puertos

No se enciende el indicador WAN Link. Qu debo comprobar?

Compruebe si el cable conectado al mdem por cable o DSL y el ruteador es el mismo que vena con el mdem. Dependiendo del tipo de conexin del mdem, necesitar un cable Ethernet recto o cruzado (el cable recto es el ms habitual). Algunos indicadores de la parte frontal del ruteador no se encienden al conectar un PC. Para que la conexin funcione correctamente slo es necesario que se encienda

el indicador Link/Act. 3. No puedo entrar en Internet ni acceder a la pgina de configuracin del ruteador. Qu debo comprobar?

A. En primer lugar, compruebe que el mdem por cable o DSL y los equipos estn conec-

tados correctamente. Para verificar si el estado de las conexiones es correcto, consulte la Pregunta n 2. B. A continuacin, compruebe si los PC estn configurados correctamente para comuni-

carse con el ruteador. A continuacin se describen las instrucciones para las distintas versiones de Windows.

- Windows 95, 98 o ME

Haga clic en el men Inicio y elija Ejecutar. En el cuadro de dilogo Ejecutar, escriba winipcfg en el campo Abrir y haga clic en el botn Aceptar. En el cuadro de dilogo Configuracin IP, haga clic en el cuadro gris con la flecha hacia abajo. Se abre una lista de adaptadores. Seleccione el adaptador que utiliza para conectarse a Internet. En los adaptadores no debe aparecer PPP, VPN, AOL ni Adaptador de Acceso telefnico a redes. En el campo Direccin IP debern aparecer las direcciones IP 192.168.1.100 o 192.168.1.xxx, donde xxx es un nmero mayor de 100. Si su direccin IP no se encuentra dentro de este rango, mantenga pulsado el botn Reset de la parte frontal del ruteador durante ms de 30 segundos. Esta operacin restablece los valores predeterminados de fbrica del ruteador, por lo que deber volver a completar la pgina de configuracin del ruteador. Despus de configurar la pgina, reinicie el equipo.

- Windows NT, 2000 y XP

Haga clic en el men Inicio y elija Ejecutar. En el cuadro de dilogo Ejecutar, escriba cmd en el campo Abrir y haga clic en el botn Aceptar. Se abre la ventana de la lnea de comandos. Escriba ipconfig /all y pulse la tecla Entrar.

En el campo Direccin IP debern aparecer las direcciones IP 192.168.1.100 o 192.168.1.xxx, donde xxx es un nmero mayor de 100. Si su direccin IP no se encuentra dentro de este rango, mantenga pulsado el botn Reset de la parte frontal del ruteador durante ms de 30 segundos. Esta operacin restablece los valores predeterminados de fbrica del ruteador, por lo que deber volver a com-

pletar la pgina de configuracin del ruteador. Despus de configurar la pgina, reinicie el equipo. C. A continuacin, configurar algunos parmetros en Windows.

- Haga doble clic en el icono Mi PC del Escritorio y, a continuacin, haga doble clic en Panel de control (Si utiliza Windows XP y la interfaz predeterminada, haga clic en Inicio y elija Panel de control). En el Panel de control, haga doble clic en el icono Opciones de Internet (Si utiliza Windows XP y la interfaz predeterminada, haga clic en Conexiones de red e Internet y, a continuacin, haga clic en Opciones de Internet). En el cuadro de dilogo Opciones de Internet, haga clic en la ficha Conexiones.

- Active la casilla de seleccin No marcar nunca una conexin. (Si la opcin aparece difuminada, no es necesario activarla.)

- Haga clic en el botn Configuracin LAN de la esquina inferior derecha.

En el cuadro de dilogo Configuracin de red de rea local (LAN) que aparece, desactive todas las casillas de seleccin.

- Haga clic en los botones Aceptar y Aplicar (el botn Aplicar aparece atenuado si no se han hecho cambios). A continuacin, vuelva a hacer clic en el botn Aceptar.

- Cierre el Panel de control y reinicie el equipo. 4. Al hacer clic en el icono de acceso a Internet y escribir el nombre de usuario y la contrasea proporcionados por mi ISP, no puedo conectar a Internet. Cul es el error?

Posiblemente, est utilizando el software que le ha proporcionado su ISP. Utilice Internet Explorer o Netscape Navigator, que puede encontrar en el Escritorio (en Windows XP, se encuentran en el men Inicio). 5. Al abrir Internet Explorer, aparece un cuadro de dilogo de conexin de Acceso telefnico a redes. Cmo se desactiva?

A. Haga doble clic en el icono Mi PC del Escritorio y, a continuacin, haga doble clic en Panel de control (Si utiliza Windows XP y la interfaz predeterminada, haga clic en Inicio y elija Panel de control). B. En el Panel de control, haga doble clic en el icono Opciones de Internet (Si utiliza Windows XP y la interfaz predeterminada, haga clic en Conexiones de red e Internet y, a continuacin, haga clic en Opciones de Internet). C. En el cuadro de dilogo Opciones de Internet, haga clic en la ficha Conexiones. 158 159 Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con conmutador de 4 puertos D. Active la casilla de seleccin No marcar nunca una conexin. E. Haga clic en el botn Aplicar. F. Haga clic en el botn Aceptar. 6. No aparece la seal de potencia de calidad de conexin. Qu puedo hacer?

A. Compruebe si el indicador WLAN LED del ruteador est encendido. B. Asegrese de que todos los PC inalmbricos utilizan el modo Infraestructura. 7. Cmo se ampla el alcance del ruteador?

A. El ruteador debe estar colocado en el lugar ms alto posible. B. No debe colocarse junto a equipos que produzcan muchas interferencias. (Por ejemplo:

altavoces, tubos fluorescentes, microondas, etc.) C. Cambie el canal inalmbrico. Para hacerlo:

Abra el navegador Web y escriba http://192.168.1.1 en el campo Direccin. En el cuadro Escribir contrasea de red, deje vaco el campo Nombre de usuario y escriba admin en el campo de contrasea. A continuacin, haga clic en Aceptar. En la ficha Configuracin, cambie el canal a 1. Haga clic en le botn Aplicar y Continuar para guardar la configuracin. Repita estos pasos hasta encontrar el canal que proporciona el mayor alcance. Configuracin de la seguridad inalmbrica Nota: La encriptacin WEP es una medida de seguridad de datos adicional no necesaria para el funcionamiento del ruteador. Las siglas en ingls WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) significan Privacidad equivalente al cableado, un sistema de proteccin de datos para las comunicaciones inalmbricas. WEP emplea una combinacin de claves de 64 o 128 bits para proporcionar control de acceso a la red y seguridad encriptada para todas las transmisiones de datos. Para des-

encriptar una transmisin, todos los puntos de la red deben utilizar una clave idntica de 64 o 128 bits. Cuanto ms alto sea el nivel de encriptacin, mayor ser la seguridad, aunque, debido a la complejidad de la encriptacin, podra afectar negativamente al rendimiento de la red. Es posible que tambin haya odo la expresin 40 bits relacionada con la encriptacin WEP. Se trata sencillamente de otro trmino utilizado para la encriptacin WEP de 64 bits. Este nivel de encriptacin WEP se denomina de 40 bits porque emplea una clave secreta de 40 bits y un vector de iniciacin de 24 bits (40 + 24 = 64). Los proveedores de comunicaciones inalmbricas utilizan los dos nombres. Linksys usa la expresin 64 bits para referirse a este nivel de encriptacin. Antes de empezar a configurar la encriptacin WEP, compruebe que la red inalmbrica funciona correctamente. Una red inalmbrica con encriptacin WEP de 128 bits NO puede comunicarse con otra red que utilice la encriptacin WEP de 64 bits. Por lo tanto, asegrese de que todos los dispositivos inalmbricos utilizan el mismo nivel de encriptacin. Los dispositivos que cumplen el estndar 802.11b son compatibles con la encriptacin WEP de 64 bits. Adems de habilitar WEP, Linksys recomienda tomar las siguientes medidas de seguri-

dad:

Cambiar el SSID predeterminado linksys por otro distinto

Cambiar la clave WEP regularmente Nota: Para activar la encriptacin WEP, debe activar antes las funciones inalmbricas. Seleccione Enable (Activar) en la ficha Wireless (Inalmbricas) del ruteador antes de continuar. 160 161 Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con conmutador de 4 puertos En los pasos siguientes se explica cmo utilizar la encriptacin WEP 1. En la ficha Setup (Configuracin) de la utilidad basada en Web, elija Mandatory

(Obligatorio) en la seccin WEP. 2. Haga clic en el botn WEP Key Setting (Configuracin de la clave WEP) para definir el tipo y el nivel de encriptacin WEP. 3. Es posible que aparez-

una ca pantalla como la que muestra la Figura C-1 solici-

tando que confirme la activacin de la encriptacin WEP. Pulse botn Aceptar para conti-

nuar. el Figura C-1 4. Se abre una pantalla como la que muestra la Figura C-2 en la que deber seleccionar los parmetros de la encriptacin WEP.

WEP (64Bit o 128B) Seleccione el nivel de encriptacin en la lista desplegable. La encriptacin WEP de 128 bits es exclusiva de Linksys y podra interferir con la encriptacin WEP de otros fabricantes. Nota: Para utilizar la encriptacin WEP, todos los puntos de la red inalmbrica deben tener activada la encriptacin WEP y la misma configuracin de claves. La clave de encriptacin WEP se genera de una de estas dos formas:

1. Puede crear una clave de encriptacin mediante una Frase clave. a. Escriba la Frase clave, una contrasea definida por el usuario, en el campo Passphrase (Frase clave). La Frase clave no debe superar los 31 caracteres entre letras, smbolos y nmeros, y no se pueden utilizar espacios. b. Haga clic en el botn Generate (Generar) para crear la clave. La clave ser de 10 dgitos si elige la encriptacin de 64 bits o de 26 dgitos si elige la encriptacin de 128 bits. Esta clave se utilizar para encriptar y desencriptar los datos transferidos entre el ruteador y la red inalmbrica de PC. Es posible que el campo Key (Clave) no muestre todos los dgitos. Haga clic en cualquier parte del campo Key y mueva el cursor hacia la derecha para ver el resto de la clave. Anote la clave completa EXACTAMENTE como aparece. 2. Tambin puede introducir manualmente la clave de encriptacin. Anote la Frase clave o la Clave manual. Necesita conservarla ya que es necesario intro-

ducir la misma clave de encriptacin WEP en todos los dispositivos inalmbricos de la red. Cuando haya elegido el mtodo de encriptacin de claves y especificado la Frase clave o la clave manual, haga clic en el botn Apply (Aplicar) para completar la configu-

racin de la encriptacin. Nota: En Windows XP, una clave de 128 bits generada por el ruteador se denomina clave de 104 bits (26 dgitos) y una de 64 bits sera una clave de 40 bits (10 dgitos) . Figura C-2 162 163 Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con conmutador de 4 puertos Configuracin de la seguridad inalmbrica en Windows XP Puesto que Windows XP no permite utilizar la funcin de Frase clave de Linksys en los adaptadores de PC inalmbricos, debe introducir manualmente la clave generada en el apartado anterior. En los pasos siguientes se explica cmo activar la encriptacin WEP y escribir manual-

mente la clave de encriptacin de las tarjetas de PC inalmbricos para que el sistema Windows XP pueda comunicarse sin cables con el ruteador. En estos pasos se presupone que la unidad de CD-ROM tiene asignada la letra D y que se est ejecutando Windows XP en el modo predeterminado. Compruebe si tiene la clave WEP generada por el ruteador. 2. En el Panel de control, haga clic en el icono Conexiones de red e Internet, como muestra la Figura C-4. 1. Como muestra la Figura C-3, haga clic en el botn Inicio y abra el Panel de control. Figura C-4 3. Haga clic en el icono Conexiones de red, como muestra la Figura C-5. Figura C-3 Figura C-5 4. Se abre el cuadro de dilogo Conexiones de red, como muestra la Figura C-6. En LAN o Internet de alta velocidad se muestran todas las tarjetas de red instaladas y en funcionamiento en su equipo. Haga doble clic en el icono Conexiones de red inalmbricas asociado a su adaptador inalmbrico. Si se abre un cuadro de dilogo de estado de la conexin inalmbrica, contine en el paso siguiente. 164 165 Instant Wireless Series Ruteador Access Point para conexiones inalmbricas con conmutador de 4 puertos Si se abre el cuadro de dilogo Conectar a red inalmbrica, en la seccin Redes disponibles, haga clic en la red inalmbrica que va a utilizar y que aparece marcada con el SSID de ruteador. A continuacin, haga doble clic en el icono Conexiones de red inalmbricas. 6. Cuando se abra el cuadro de dilogo de propiedades de la conexin inalmbrica que muestra la Figura C-8, haga clic en la ficha Redes inalmbricas. Figura C-6 5. Cuando se abra el cuadro de dilogo de estado de la conexin inalmbrica que muestra la Figura C-7, haga clic en el botn Propiedades. Figura C-8 7. Si en la seccin Redes preferidas aparece la red inalmbrica correcta que indica del ruteador, como muestra la Figura C-9, haga doble clic en ella y contine en el siguiente paso. el SSID Si no aparece, en la sec-

cin Redes disponibles haga clic en la red inalm-

brica que indica el SSID del ruteador. A continua-

cin, haga clic en el botn Configurar. Figura C-7 166 Figura C-9 167 Instant Wireless Series 8. Se abre el cuadro de dilogo de propiedades de la red inalmbrica, como muestra la Figura C-10. Active la casilla de seleccin de la opcin Encriptacin de datos (WEP habilita-

do). Desactive las casillas de seleccin de los campos Autenticacin de red (modo compartido) y La clave la proporciono yo automticamente. En el campo Clave de red, escriba la clave exacta (los 10 o 26 dgitos, segn el nivel de encriptacin) generada por el ruteador. Compruebe que el campo Formato de clave muestra Dgitos hexadecimales y que el campo Longitud de la clave muestra 40 bits (10 dgitos) o 104 bits (26 dgitos). Si no aparecen estos datos, la clave que ha escrito no es correcta. Figura C-10 Haga clic en el botn Aceptar para guardar la configuracin. Haga clic en los botones Aceptar restantes hasta que regrese al cuadro de dilogo de estado de la conexin de red inalmbrica. Cierre los cuadros de dilogo abiertos para regresar al Escritorio de Windows XP. Cierre todas las aplicaciones y reinicie el equipo. Cuando vuelva a arrancar, la configu-

racin de WEP estar completa y podr conectarse sin cables al ruteador. 168 www.linksys.com Copyright 2002 Linksys, All Rights Reserved. Printed in the USA. Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Use this Guide to install:

BEFW11S4 User Guide EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPE) Linksys Group declares that the Instant Wireless Series products included in the Instant Wireless Series conform to the specifications listed below, following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC:

ten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien niden direktiivien muiden ehtojen mukainen. Linksys Group dclare que la carte PC Instant Wireless IEEE 802.11 est conforme aux conditions essentielles et aux dispositions relatives la directive 1999/5/EC, la directive 89/336/EEC, et la directive 73/23/EEC. Belgique B Lutilisation en extrieur est autoris sur le canal 11 (2462 MHz), 12 (2467 MHz), et 13 (2472 MHz). Dans le cas dune utilisation prive, lextrieur dun btiment, au-dessus dun espace public, aucun enregistrement nest ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de lIBPT est requise. Pour une utilisation publique lextrieur de btiments, une licence de lIBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter lIBPT. France F: Bande de frquence restreinte: seuls les canaux 10, 11, 12, 13 (2457, 2462, 2467, et 2472 MHz respectivement) doivent tre utiliss en France. Toute util-

gungspflichtig. Bitte mit Hndler die Vorgehensweise abstimmen. Germany D: License required for outdoor installations. Check with reseller for proce-

dure to follow. Italia I: E' necessaria la concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso interno. Verificare con i rivenditori la procedura da seguire. L'uso per installazione in esterni non e' per-

messa. Italy I: License required for indoor use. Use with outdoor installations not allowed. the Netherlands NL License required for outdoor installations. Check with reseller for procedure to follow. Nederlands NL Licentie verplicht voor gebruik met buitenantennes. Neem contact op met verkoper voor juiste procedure. COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS Copyright 2002 Linksys, All Rights Reserved. Instant Wireless is a trademark of Linksys. Linksys and the Linksys logo are registered trademarks of Linksys Group, Inc. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and brand names are the property of their respective proprietors. FCC STATEMENT The Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-

ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harm-

ful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment or devices Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receivers Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance For product support and product registration, contact us at the addresses below:

E-mail Web europe-support@linksys.com latam-soporte@linksys.com http://www.linksys.com/international UG-BEFW11S4 v3-21009NC TE Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Table of Contents Chapter 1: Introduction The Linksys Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Features Minimum Requirements An Introduction to LANs and WANs IP Addresses The Wireless Access Point Routers Ports The Wireless Access Point Routers LEDs Chapter 2: Connecting the Router Before You Start Connecting Your Hardware Together & Booting Up Chapter 3: Configuring the PCs Overview Configuring Windows 95, 98, and Millennium PCs Configuring Windows 2000 PCs Configuring Windows XP PCs Chapter 4: Configuring the Router 1 1 1 2 2 3 5 6 8 8 8 11 11 11 13 15 17 Chapter 5: Using the Routers Web-Based Utility 22 23 27 28 30 31 33 35 37 41 46 47 Setup Password Status DHCP Log Security Help Advanced Tab: Filters Advanced Tab: Port Range Forwarding Advanced Tab: Dynamic Routing Advanced Tab: Static Routing Advanced Tab: DMZ Host Advanced Tab: MAC Address Cloning Advanced Tab: Wireless Appendix A: Troubleshooting Common Problems and Solutions Frequently Asked Questions Appendix B: How to Ping Your ISPs E-mail and Web Addresses Appendix C: Configuring Wireless Security Configuring Wireless Security in Windows XP Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter Appendix E: Setting Up AOL Broadband Cable & DSL AOL Broadband via Cable AOL Broadband via DSL Appendix F: Glossary Appendix G: Specifications Environmental Appendix H: Contact Information Appendix I: Warranty Information 49 50 51 54 54 67 73 76 79 84 88 88 90 91 105 106 107 108 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Chapter 1: Introduction The Linksys Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Congratulations on your purchase of a Wireless Access Point Router with 4-

Port Switch. The Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch provides the ideal solution for connecting your wireless network to a high-speed broadband Internet connection and a 10/100 Fast Ethernet backbone. Configurable as a DHCP server for your existing network, the Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch acts as the only externally recognized Internet gateway on your local area network (LAN) and serves as an Internet NAT firewall against unwanted outside intruders. The Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch can also be configured to filter internal users access to the Internet. A typical router relies on a hub or a switch to share its Internet connection, but the Linksys Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch channels this connection through the blazing, full duplex speed of its built-in EtherFast 10/100 4-Port Switch. This cutting-edge combination of wireless router and switch technology eliminates the need to buy an additional hub or switch and extends the range of your wireless network. Now your entire wireless network can enjoy blazing broadband Internet connections supported by its robust switched backbone. With the dual-function speed and power of the Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch, your network will take off at speeds faster than you ever imagined possible. Features Supports Universal Plug-and-Play for easy configuration Capable of up to 128-bit WEP Encryption Supports enhanced security using NAT firewall, ZoneAlarm Pro and PC-

cillin Software*

Access your network remotely over the Internet through Virtual Private Networking (VPN) Supports IPSec and PPTP Pass-Through Administer and upgrade the Router remotely over the Internet Configurable as a DHCP Server on your network Advanced security management functions for Port Filtering, MAC Address Filtering, and DMZ Hosting Includes one Ethernet Cable to Connect to a Cable or DSL modem

* Full versions can be downloaded and/or purchased separately (Windows versions). Support for PC-cillin and Zone Alarm Pro may be limited or not available outside of United States and Canada. Minimum Requirements One Windows 98 SE, Millennium, 2000, or XP PC equipped with:

TCP/IP Protocol, Internet Explorer 4.0 or Netscape Navigator 4.7 for web-based configuration, a CD-ROM Drive, and an Ethernet Adapter with a UTP CAT 5 Network Cable Cable or DSL Modem with Ethernet Connection and Internet Access An Introduction to LANs and WANs Simply put, a router is a network device that connects two networks together. In this instance, the Router connects your Local Area Network (LAN), or the group of PCs in your home or office, to the Wide Area Network (WAN) that is the Internet. The Router processes and regulates the data that travels between these two networks. Think of the Router as a network device with two sides. The first side is made up of your private Local Area Network (LAN) of PCs. The other, public side is the Internet, or the Wide Area Network (WAN), outside of your home or office. The Routers firewall (NAT) protects your network of PCs so users on the pub-

lic, Internet side cannot see your PCs. This is how your LAN, or network, remains private. The Router protects your network by inspecting the first pack-

et coming in from the WAN port before delivery to the final destination on the LAN port. The Router inspects Internet port services like the web server, ftp server, or other Internet applications, and, if allowed, it will forward the packet to the appropriate PC on the LAN side. 1 2 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Dynamic IP Addresses IP Addresses Whats an IP Address?

IP stands for Internet Protocol. Every device on an IP-based network, includ-

ing PCs, print servers, and routers, requires an IP address to identify its loca-

tion, or address, on the network. This applies to both the WAN and LAN con-

nections. There are two ways of assigning an IP address to your network devices. Static IP Addresses A static IP address is a fixed IP address that you assign manually to a PC or other device on the network. Since a static IP address remains valid until you disable it, static IP addressing insures that the device assigned it will have that same IP address until you change it. Static IP addresses are commonly used with network devices such as server PCs or print servers. If you use the Router to share your cable or DSL Internet connection, contact your ISP to find out if they have assigned a static IP address to your account. If so, you will need that static IP address when configuring the Router. You can get the information from your ISP. Note: Since the Router is a device that connects two networks, it needs two IP addressesone for the LAN side, and one for the WAN side. In this User Guide, youll see references to the WAN IP address and the LAN IP address. Since the Router has firewall security (NAT), only the Routers WAN IP address can be seen from the Internet. However, even the WAN IP address can be blocked, so that the Router and network seem invisible to the InternetThis is shown in the Filters section in Chapter 5: Using the Routers Web-Based Utility. A dynamic IP address is automatically assigned to a device on the network, such as PCs and print servers. These IP addresses are called dynamic because they are only temporarily assigned to the PC or device. After a certain time period, they expire and may change. If a PC logs on to the network (or the Internet) and its dynamic IP address has expired, the DHCP server will assign it a new dynamic IP address. For DSL users, many ISPs may require you to log on with a user name and password to gain access to the Internet. This is called Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet or PPPoE. PPPoE is similar to a dial-up connection but does not have a phone number to dial into, and PPPoE is a dedicated high-speed con-

nection. PPPoE also will provide the Router with a dynamic IP address to establish a connection to the Internet. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Servers DHCP frees you from having to assign IP addresses manually every time a new user is added to your network. PCs and other network devices using dynamic IP addressing are assigned a new IP address by a DHCP server. The PC or net-

work device obtaining an IP address is called the DHCP client. The Routers WAN port is, by default, set as a DHCP client. DHCP servers can either be a designated PC on the network or another network device, such as the Router. By default, a DHCP server is enabled on your Routers LAN ports. If you already have a DHCP server running on your net-

work, you must disable one of the two DHCP servers. If you run more than one DHCP server on your network, you will experience network errors, such as conflicting IP addresses. To disable the Routers DHCP function, see the DHCP section in Chapter 3: Configuring the Router. Note: Even if you assign a static IP address to a PC, other PCs can still use DHCPs dynamic IP addressing, as long as the static IP is not within the DHCP range of the LAN IP Address. If the Routers DHCP function fails to provide a dynamic IP address for any reason, please refer to Appendix A: Troubleshooting. 3 4 The Wireless Access Point Routers Ports The Reset Button Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Pressing the Reset Button and holding it in for a few seconds will clear all of the Routers data and restore the factory defaults. This should be done only if you are experiencing heavy routing problems, and only after you have exhausted all of the other troubleshooting options. By resetting the Router, you run the risk of creating conflicts between your PCs actual IP Addresses and what the Router thinks their IP Addresses should be. You may be forced to reboot each network PC. If the Router locks up, simply press the reset button or power it down for three to five seconds by removing the power cable from the Routers Power Port. Leaving the power off for too long could result in the loss of network connections. The Wireless Access Point Routers LEDs The LAN Indicators Figure 1-2 WLAN Act Green. This LED indicates wireless activity. WLAN Link Green. This LED indicates that the Routers wireless func-

tions have been enabled through the Web-based utility. Power Green. This LED indicates that the Routers power is on. Link/Act Green. This LED serves two purposes. When this LED is lit continuously, this indicates that the Router is connected to a device through the corresponding port (1, 2, 3, or 4). A blink-

ing LED indicates that the Router is actively sending or receiving data over that port. When the Uplink Port is in use, the LED for Port 4 will be lit continuously. 6 Figure 1-1 The Routers rear panel (as shown in Figure 1-1) is where all of its connections are made. WAN Ports 1-4 Uplink The WAN (Wide Area Network) Port is where you will con-

nect your cable or DSL modem with an Ethernet cable. Your modem connection will not work from any other port. These four LAN (Local Area Network) ports are where you will connect networked devices, such as PCs, print servers, and any other Ethernet devices you want to put on your net-

work. If Port 4 is being used, the Uplink Port will not work. The Uplink Port is where you can expand your network by connecting to another switch or hub. Uplinking to another switch or a hub is done by simply running a cable from the Uplink Port to the other device. The Uplink Port is shared with Port 4. If the Uplink port is being used, Port 4 will not work. Power The Power Port is where you will connect the included AC Power adapter. Antenna Jacks The Antenna Jacks are where the included antennas are con-

nected. 5 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Full/Col Green. This LED also serves two purposes. When this LED is lit continuously, the connection made through the corre-

sponding port is running in Full Duplex mode. A blinking LED indicates that the connection is experiencing collisions. Infrequent collisions are normal. If this LED blinks too often, there may be a problem with your connection. Refer to the Troubleshooting Appendix if you think there is a prob-

lem. 100 Orange. This LED indicates when a successful 100Mbps connection is made through the corresponding port. The WAN Indicators Link Act Diag Green. This LED indicates a connection between the Router and your broadband device or network. Green. This LED blinks when the Router is sending or receiving data over the broadband (WAN) port. Red. This LED indicates the Routers self-diagnosis mode during boot-up and restart. It will turn off upon completing the diagnosis. If this LED stays on for an abnormally long period of time, refer to the Troubleshooting Appendix. Chapter 2: Connecting the Router Before You Start Before plugging everything together, its always a good idea to have everything youll need to get the Router up and running. Depending upon how you config-

ure the Router in Chapter 4: Configuring the Router, you may need some of the following values from your ISP:

When connecting through a Static IP connection, be sure to have 1) Your broadband-configured PCs fixed Internet IP Address, 2) Your broadband-

configured PCs Computer Name and Workgroup Name, 3) Your Subnet Mask, 4) Your Default Gateway, and 5) Your Primary DNS IP address. When connecting through a PPPoE connection, be sure to have 1) Your PPPoE User Name and 2) Your PPPoE Password. The installation technician from your ISP should have left this information with you after installing your broadband connection. If not, you can call your ISP to request the data. Once you have the above values, you can begin the Routers installation and setup. Connecting Your Hardware Together and Booting Up Once you are sure that you have the above values on hand, you can begin the Installation and Setup of the Router. 1. Power everything down, including your PCs, your cable or DSL modem and the Router. 2. Connect an Ethernet cable from one of your PCs Ethernet ports to one of the Routers LAN ports (as shown in Figure 2-

1). Do the same with all the PCs you wish to connect to the Router. (LAN Port 4 will become inactive if you use the Uplink port.) In addition to accessing the Router through an Ethernet connection, a wireless connec-

Figure 2-1 7 8 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch tion can be used to access the Router. See the For Wireless Connections section that follows these connection instructions. 3. Connect another Ethernet cable from your cable or DSL modem to the Routers WAN port (as shown in Figure 2-2). For Wireless Connections:

In addition to accessing the Router through an Ethernet connection, a wireless connection can be used to access the Router. After powering on the Router and connecting it to your modem, enter the Routers IP Address in the Address field of your wireless PCs web-browser as follows: http://192.168.1.1 and press Enter. Important: The Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch is configured by default to work out of the box with all Linksys Wireless Adapters. If you have changed the defaults on your Linksys Wireless Adapters, or are using other wireless adapters, you must temporar-

ily change your wireless adapter settings to: (SSID = linksys) in order to initially access the Router wirelessly. After you have accessed the Router with the default settings, you can change the router settings to coincide with your Network settings and reset your adapters. Important: Some ISPsmost notably some cable providersconfig-

ure their networks so that you do not have to enter a full Internet address into your web browser or e-mail application to reach your home page or receive your e-mail. If your Internet home page address is something very simple, such as www, rather than www.linksys.com, or your e-mail servers address is something sim-

ilar to e-mail or pop3, rather than pop.mail.linksys.com, you wont be able to properly configure the Router until you determine the actual Internet addresses of your Web and e-mail connections. You must obtain this information prior to connecting the Router to your network. You can obtain this information by contacting your ISP. 4. Connect the Power Adapter (included) to the Routers Power port (as shown in Figure 2-3) and plug the other end into a power outlet. Figure 2-2 The Power LED will illuminate green as soon as the power adapter is con-

nected. The Diag LED will illuminate red for a few seconds while the Router goes through its internal diagnostic test. The LED will turn off when the self-test is complete. 5. Power on the cable or DSL modem. Verify Figure 2-3 that the power is on by checking the Link LED in the WAN column on the front of the Router. The Link LED will be illuminated if the power is on and the modem is ready. 6. Press the Reset button on the back of the Router. Hold the button in for three seconds, or until the Diag LED illuminates red. This restores the Routers default settings. 7. Power on your PC. The Router is now connected. Continue to the next chapter to configure your PCs. 9 10 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Chapter 3: Configuring the PCs Overview These instructions will help you configure each of your computers to commu-

nicate with the Router. To do this, you will need to configure your PCs network settings to obtain an IP (or TCP/IP) address automatically. Computers use IP addresses to commu-

nicate with each other across a network or the Internet. You will need to know which operating system your computer is running, such as Windows 95, 98, Millennium, 2000, or XP. You can find out by clicking the Start button and then selecting the Settings option. (If your Start menu does -

nt have a Settings option, youre running Windows XP. You can select the Control Panel directly from the Start Menu.) Then, click Control Panel and double-click the System icon. Click the Cancel button when done. Once you know which Windows operating system you are running, follow the directions in this step for your computers operating system. If you PC is not configured with the TCP/IP protocol, you will need to do this for each com-

puter you are connecting to the Router. The next few pages tell you, step by step, how to configure your TCP/IP set-

tings based on the type of Windows operating system you are using. Once you've configured your computers, continue to Chapter 4: Configuring the Router. Configuring Windows 95, 98, and Millennium PCs 1. Click the Start button, click Settings and open the Control Panel. From there, double-click the Network icon to open the Network screen. for 2. Select the Configuration tab and highlight the TCP/IP line the applicable Ethernet adapter (as shown in Figure 3-1). If the word TCP/IP appears by itself, select that line. (Note: If there is no TCP/IP line list-

ed, refer to your Ethernet adapters documentation to install TCP/IP now.) Then, click the Properties button. Figure 3-1 3. Click the IP Address tab and select Obtain an IP address automatically (as shown in figure 3-2). 11 4. Click the Gateway tab and verify that the Installed Gateway field is blank. Click the OK button. Figure 3-2 12 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch 5. Click the OK button again. Windows may ask you for the original Windows installation disk or additional files. Supply them by pointing to the D:\win9x, c:\windows\options\cabs, etc. (This assumes that D is the letter of your CD-ROM drive). D:\win98, location, correct e.g., file 6. If Windows asks you to restart your PC, click the Yes button. If Windows does not ask you to restart, restart your computer anyway. Repeat steps 1-6 for each PC on your network. When all of your PCs are configured, proceed to Chapter 4: Configuring the Router. Configuring Windows 2000 PCs 1. Click the Start button, click Settings and open the Control Panel. From there, double-click the Network and Dial-up Connections icon. This will display the Network screen. 2. Select the Local Area Connection icon for the applicable Ethernet adapter (usually it is the first Area Connection listed). Local 4. Select Internet Protocol

(TCP/IP)

(as shown in Figure 3-4) and click the Properties button. 5. Select Obtain an IP address automatically and verify that Obtain DNS server address automatically is select-

ed (as shown in Figure 3-5). Then, click the OK button and click the OK button on the subse-

quent screens to com-

plete the PCs configura-

tion. Figure 3-4 3. When the Local Area Connection Status screen appears, click the Properties button. (See Figure 3-3.) Figure 3-3 13 14 Repeat steps 1-5 for each PC on your network. When all of your PCs are configured, proceed to Chapter 4: Configuring the Router. Figure 3-5 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Configuring Windows XP PCs The following instructions assume you are running Windows XPs default interface. If you are using the Classic interface (where the icons and menus look like previous Windows versions), please follow the instructions for Windows 2000. 1. Click the Start button, open the Control Panel. and click the Network and Internet Connections icon. Then, click the Network Connections icon to display the Network screen. 4. Select Internet Protocol

(TCP/IP)

(as shown in Figure 3-7) and click the Properties button. 2. Select the Local Area Connection icon for the applicable Ethernet adapter (usually it is the first Local Area Connection listed). 3. When the Local Area Connection Status screen appears, click the Properties button. (See Figure 3-6.) Figure 3-6 Figure 3-7 5. Select Obtain an IP address automatically and verify that Obtain DNS server address auto-

matically is selected (as shown in Figure 3-8). Then, click the OK button and click the OK button on the subsequent screens to complete the PCs configu-

ration. 15 Repeat steps 1-5 for each PC on your network. When all of your PCs are configured, proceed to Chapter 4: Configuring the Router. Figure 3-8 16 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Chapter 4: Configuring the Router This chapter will show you how to configure the Router to function in your net-

work and gain access to the Internet through your Internet Service Provider

(ISP). Detailed description of the Routers Web-based Utility can be found in the Chapter 5: Using the Routers Web-Based Utility. Your ISP may require the use of a Host Name and Domain Name. Further, you will set the WAN Configuration Type on the Routers Setup tab from the information given by your ISP. You will need this setup information from your ISP. If you do not have this information, please contact your ISP before proceeding. The instructions from your ISP tell you how to set up your PC for Internet access. Since you are now using the Router to share Internet access among sev-

eral computers, you will use this setup information for Router configuration. 1. Open your web browser, and enter 192.168.1.1 into the web browsers Address field, as shown in Figure 4-1. Then, press the Enter key. Figure 4-1 2. An Enter Network Password window, shown in Figure 4-2a, will appear.

(Windows XP users will see a Connect to 192.168.1.1 window, shown in Figure 4-2b.) Leave the User Name field empty, and enter admin (the default password) in lowercase letters in the Password field. Then, click the OK button. Figure 4-2a Figure 4-2b 3. If required by your ISP, enter the Routers Host Name and Domain Name in the appropriate fields on the Setup tab. (This is usually required by cable ISPs.) 4. To configure the Router for your wire-

less network, verify that the Setup tabs Wireless fields (shown in Figure 4-3) are completed as follows:

E n a b l e / D i s a b l e :

Selecting the Enable button will radio the Routers enable wireless feature. Wireless functions will not be available unless enabled. Figure 4-3 SSID: The SSID is a unique name for your wireless network. It is case sen-

sitive and must not exceed 32 characters. The default SSID is "linksys " but you should change this to a personal wireless network name. All wireless points in your network must use the same SSID. SSID Broadcast - Allows the SSID to be broadcast on your network. You may want to enable this function while configuring the Router, but make sure that you disable it when you are finished. With this enabled, someone could easily obtain the SSID information with site survey software and gain unauthorized access to your network. Click Enable to broadcast. Click Disable to increase network security and prevent the SSID from being seen on networked PCs. Channel: Select the appropriate channel for your network from the list pro-

vided. All wireless points in your network must use the same channel in order to function properly. Do not change the WEP setting from the default, Disabled, without first referring to the Wireless Security sections of the User Guide or Setup Wizard CD-ROM for advanced features and settings. 17 18 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch 5. The Router supports five connection types: DHCP (obtain an IP automati-

cally), PPPoE, Static IP Address, RAS, and PPTP. These types are selected from the drop-down menu beside WAN Connection Type. The Setup tab and available features will differ depending on what kind of connection type you select, the instructions for which are included here:

Obtain an IP Automatically If your ISP says that you are connecting through a dynamic IP address (or DHCP), perform these steps:

a. Select Obtain an IP automatically as the WAN Connection Type (as previously shown in Figure 4-3). b. Click the Apply button to save the settings. Static IP If your ISP says that you are connecting through a static (or fixed) IP address, perform these steps (as shown in Figure 4-4):

PPPoE If your DSL provider says that you are con-

necting through PPPoE or if you normally enter a user name and pass-

word the Internet, perform these steps (shown in Figure 4-5):

to access a. Select PPPoE as the WAN C o n n e c t i o n Type. b. Enter Name. the User c. Enter the Password. Figure 4-5 a. Select Static IP as the WAN Connection Type. d. Click the Apply button to save the settings. b. In the fields beside WAN IP Specify Address, enter the IP Address. c. Enter the Subnet Mask. d. Enter the Default Gateway Address. e. Enter the DNS in the 1, 2, and/or 3 fields. You must enter at least one DNS address. f. Click the Apply button to save the settings. RAS (for SingTel Users) RAS is a service used in Singapore only. If you are using a RAS connection

(as shown in Figure 4-6), check with your ISP for the necessary setup infor-

mation. 19 Figure 4-4 Figure 4-6 20 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch PPTP PPTP is a service used in Europe only. If you are using a PPTP connection

(as shown in Figure 4-7), check with your ISP for the necessary setup infor-

mation. Figure 4-7 6. If you havent already done so, click the Apply button to save the settings. 7. Reset the power on your cable or DSL modem and restart your computers. They will now obtain the Router's new settings. Note: You only need to configure the Router from one computer. If you need advanced setting information, please refer to the Linksys support web-

site at support.linksys.com or the User Guide on the Setup Wizard CD-

ROM. Congratulations! Youve successfully configured the Router. You can test the setup by opening your web browser from any computer and entering www.linksys.com/registration (as shown in Figure 4-8). Figure 4-8 If you are unable to reach our website, you may want to review what you did in this section or refer to the Troubleshooting Appendix. Chapter 5: Using the Routers Web-

Based Utility For your convenience, an administrative utility has been programmed into the Router. This chapter will explain all of the functions in this utility. All router-

based administrative tasks are performed through this web utility. The web util-

ity can be accessed by any PC on the network by typing http://192.168.1.1 in the PCs web browser address window, as shown in Figure 5-1. Figure 5-1 Upon entering the address into the web browser, a password request page will pop up, as shown in Figure 5-2a. (Windows XP users will see a Connect to 192.168.1.1 window, shown in Figure 5-2b.) Figure 5-2a Figure 5-2b Leave the User Name field empty, and enter admin (the default password) in lowercase letters in the Password field. Then, click the OK button. In this chapter, you will find brief descriptions of each of the utilitys tabs and its more important functions. More detailed explanations and instructions can be found by clicking each pages Help button or on Linksyss website at www.linksys.com. To clear any values youve entered on any page, click the Cancel button. To apply any settings youve altered on any page, click the Apply button. 21 22 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch The utilitys tabs: Setup, Password, Status, DHCP, Log, Security and Help are used for Basic Setup of the Router. When the Advanced Tab is clicked, further options will be displayed for Filters, Forwarding, Dynamic Routing, Static Routing DMZ Host, MAC Address Cloning, and Wireless configuration. Setup The Setup tab is the first tab you will see when you access the Utility. If you have already installed and set up the Router, you have already seen this tab and have already properly configured all of the values. Host Name This entry is necessary for some ISPs and can be provided by them. Domain Name This entry is neces-

sary for some ISPs and can be provided by them. Firmware Version This displays the firmware version the Router is cur-

rently using. As future ver-

sions of the Routers firmware become available, they can be downloaded from the Linksys website at www.linksys.com. Note: Due to differences in web browsers, some screen shots may differ. Figure 5-3 LAN IP Address and Subnet Mask This is the Routers IP Address and Subnet Mask as seen on the internal LAN. The default value is 192.168.1.1 for IP Address and 255.255.255.0 for Subnet Mask. Wireless (Enable/Disable). In order to utilize the Routers wireless func-

tions, select Enable. If you do not wish to utilize any wireless functions, make sure Disable is selected. (Note: No other wireless functions will be available unless you enable this setting.) SSID: The SSID is a unique name for your wireless network. It is case sensi-

tive and must not exceed 32 characters. The default SSID is "linksys " but you should change this to a personal wireless network name. All wireless points in your network must use the same SSID. Verify that you are using the correct SSID and click the Apply button to set it. SSID Broadcast - Allows the SSID to be broadcast on your network. You may want to enable this function while configuring the Router, but make sure that you disable it when you are finished. With this enabled, someone could easily obtain the SSID information with site survey software and gain unauthorized access to your network. Click Enable to broadcast. Click Disable to increase network security and prevent the SSID from being seen on networked PCs. Channel Select the appropriate channel from the list provided to correspond with your network settings, between 1 and 11. (Higher channels can only be used outside of the United States and Canada.) All points in your wireless net-

work must use the same channel in order to function correctly. Verify that the correct channel is selected and click the Apply button to set it. WEP (Mandatory/Disable). In order to utilize WEP encryption, select Enable. If you do not wish to utilize WEP encryption, make sure Disable is selected. WEP Key Setting When WEP Encryption is Enabled, press this button to modify the WEP Key Settings. For further details on configuring Wireless Security, using WEP, refer to Appendix C: Configuring Wireless Security. WAN Connection Type The Router supports five connection types: DHCP

(obtain an IP automatically), PPPoE, Static IP Address, RAS, and PPTP. These types are selected from the drop-down menu beside WAN Connection Type. The Setup tab and available features will differ depending on what kind of connection type you select. Each option is described on the following pages. Obtain an IP Automatically If your ISP says that you are connecting through a dynamic IP address (or DHCP), select this option from the drop-down menu (as shown in Figure 5-3). Now, the Router will accept the dynamic IP addresses assigned by your ISP when connecting to the Internet. 23 24 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Static IP If your ISP says that you are connecting through a static (or fixed) IP address, select this option from the drop-down menu (as shown in Figure 5-

4). The Router will utilize that static IP Address when the following infor-

mation is entered into the appropriate field:

Figure 5-4 WAN IP Address and Subnet Mask This is the Routers IP Address and Subnet Mask as seen by external users on the Internet (including your ISP). Default Gateway Address Your ISP will provide you with the Gateway IP Address. DNS (Domain Name Server) IP Address Your ISP will provide you with at least one DNS IP Address. PPPoE Some DSL-based ISPs use PPPoE

( P o i n t - t o - P o i n t Protocol over Ethernet) to estab-

lish communica-

tions with an end-

user. If you are using a DSL line, check with your ISP to see if they use PPPoE. If they do use PPPoE, select this from the drop-

down menu

(as shown in Figure 5-

5). Figure 5-5 If you do enable PPPoE, remember to remove any existing PPPoE applica-

tions already on any of your PCs. User Name and Password Enter the User Name and Password you use when logging onto your ISP connection. Connect on Demand and Max Idle Time You can configure the Router to disconnect your ISP connection after a specified period of time (Max Idle Time). If you have been disconnected due to inactivity, Connect on Demand enables the Router to automatically re-establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. If you wish to activate Connect on Demand, click the radio button. If you want your Internet con-

nection to remain on at all times, enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects. Keep Alive Option and Redial Period This option keeps you connected to your ISP indefinitely, even when your connection sits idle. To use this option, click the radio button next to Keep Alive. The default Redial Period is 30 seconds. 25 26 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch RAS (for SingTel Users) RAS is a service used in Singapore only. If you are using a RAS connection

(as shown in Figure 4-6), check with your ISP for the necessary setup infor-

mation. Router Password For greater security, you should set a password for the Router. If you dont set the password, all users on your network will be able to access the Router using the default password admin. We recommend that you change your password often. PPTP PPTP is a service used in Europe only. If you are using a PPTP connection

(as shown in Figure 4-7), check with your ISP for the necessary setup infor-

mation. You can confirm that the above settings are correct by successfully connecting to the Internet. To clear any values youve entered on any page, click the Cancel button. To apply any settings youve altered on any page, click the Apply button. Password From the Password tab, shown in Figure 5-7, you can change the Routers Password, enable Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Services for systems such as Windows XP PCs, and restore the Routers factory default settings. Figure 5-7 UPnP Services Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) allows systems, such as Windows XP PCs to automatically configure the Router for various Internet applications, such as gaming and videoconferencing. Click the radio button next to Enable to enable UPnP Services, or Disable to disable UPnP Services. Restore Factory Defaults If you select the Restore Factory Default option and click the Apply button, you will clear all of the Routers settings and restore the default settings. Do not restore the factory defaults unless you are having difficulties with the Router and have exhausted all other troubleshooting measures. Once the Router is reset, you will have to re-enter all of your configuration data. To clear any values youve entered on any page, click the Cancel button. To apply any settings youve altered on any page, click the Apply button. Status The Status tab, shown in Figure 5-8, displays the Routers current status; it reflects the data and selections youve entered using the Setup tab and provides options for DHCP users. Note: The information provided on the Status tab may vary depending on the Routers settings. All of the information provided on the Status tab is read-only and can be changed using the Setup tab. Host Name This field shows the name of the Router. This entry is neces-

sary for some ISPs. Firmware Version This field shows the installed version and date of the firmware. Version dates are slightly more accurate than version numbers. Login This indicates if you are using a dial-up style connection like PPPoE, RAS, or PPTP. For PPPoE, RAS, or PPTP only, there is a Connect button to click if you are disconnected and want to re-establish a connec-

tion. 27 28 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch DHCP A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server a u t o m a t i c a l l y assigns IP addresses to each computer on its network. Unless you already have one, you should set the Router up as a DHCP server. This is done on the DHCP tab, shown in Figure 5-9. Figure 5-8 LAN These fields display the current IP Address and Subnet Mask of the Router, as seen by users on your local area network. The DHCP Server field shows the status of the Routers DHCP server function, which is either enabled or disabled. WAN These fields display the WAN IP Address, WAN Subnet Mask, and WAN Default Gateway IP Address of the Router, as seen by external users on the Internet. The DNS (Domain Name System) IP Address fields show the IP address(es) of the DNS currently used by the Router. Multiple DNS IP set-

tings are common. In most cases, the first available DNS entry is used. DHCP Release Click the DHCP Release button to delete the current IP address of the device connected to the Routers WAN port. DHCP Renew Click the DHCP Renew button to replace the current IP addressof the device connected to the Routers WAN portwith a new IP address. DHCP Clients Table This table lists the PCs that were given IP addresses by the Router. 29 Figure 5-9 DHCP Server Click the Enable option to enable the Routers DHCP serv-

er function If you already have a DHCP server on your network, set the Routers DHCP option to Disable. Starting IP Address Enter a numerical value for the DHCP server to start with when issuing IP addresses. Number of DHCP users Enter the maximum number of PCs that will require IP addresses assigned by the Router. No more than 253 computers can be used. In order to determine the DHCP IP Address range, add the starting IP address (e.g., 100) to the number of DHCP users. By default, as shown in Figure 5-9, if you add 50 users, the range or IP Addresses will be 192.168.1.100 to 192.168.1.149. Client Lease Time The Client Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP address. Enter the amount of time, in minutes, that the user will be leased this dynamic IP address. 30 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch DNS The Domain Name System (DNS) is how the Internet translates domain or website names into Internet addresses or URLs. Your ISP will provide you with at least one DNS Server IP Address. If you wish to use another, type that IP Address in one of these fields. You can type up to three DNS Server IP Addresses here. The Router will use these for quicker access to functioning DNS servers. WINS The Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) manages each PCs interaction with the Internet. If you use a WINS server, enter that servers IP Address here. Otherwise, left this blank. DHCP Clients Table When this button is clicked, a table similar to that shown in Figure 5-10 appears, displaying a list of PCs assigned IP address-

es by the Router. Click the Refresh button to display the most current information. If you wish to delete a clients IP address, select that client by clicking the box to the right and click the Delete button. Figure 5-10 To clear any values youve entered on any page, click the Cancel button. To apply any settings youve altered on any page, click the Apply button. Log The Log tab, shown in Figure 5-11, provides you with a log of all incoming and outgoing URLs or IP addresses for your Internet connection. To access activity logs, select the Enable option next to Access Log. This function can be disabled by clicking the Disable radio button. With logging Enabled, you can choose to view temporary logs or have a per-

manent record, using the Logviewer software. Temporary logs can be accessed from the Log tab by clicking either the Incoming Access Log or Outgoing Access Log buttons. The Incoming Access Log gives you a log of all the incoming Internet traffic while the Outgoing Access Log lists all the URLs and IP addresses of Internet sites that users on your network have accessed. Figure 5-11 For a permanent record of these logs, Logviewer software must be used. This software is downloadable from the Linksys website at www.linksys.com. The Logviewer saves all incoming and outgoing activity as a permanent file on your PCs hard drive. Next to Send Log to, enter the fixed IP address of the PC running the Logviewer software. The Router will now send updated logs to that PC. To clear any values youve entered on any page, click the Cancel button. To apply any settings youve altered on any page, click the Apply button. 31 32 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Security Figure 5-12 The Security tab, as shown in Figure 5-12, enables configuration of the Router to provide enhanced network security using ZoneAlarm Pro and PC-cillin

(each sold separately). While the Router provides a built-in Internet NAT fire-

wall, ZoneAlarm Pro enhances the Routers security capabilities for increased protection against hackers and other threats from the Internet and PC-cillin pro-

tects against viruses. ZoneAlarm Pro and PC-cillin work independently of each other. For more information on ZoneAlarm Pro, PC-cillin, and DSL or cable network security, please click the on-screen link to the Internet Security Center. Software Download Click this button to purchase and download ZoneAlarm Pro and/or PC-cillin at the Internet Security Center. Print the summary page, which contains the license key needed for installation, or write down the license key if you are unable to print the page. You will also be e-mailed a confirmation invoice with the key included. When adding security enhancements to your other networked computers, you can either copy the downloaded files to the other PCs or re-

download the software on each individual PC without incurring any more costs. Note: Your license key will be e-mailed to you. 33 ZoneAlarm Pro Settings If you have downloaded ZoneAlarm Pro, complete this section. License Key Enter the License Key for ZoneAlarm Pro. The License Key will be e-mailed to you after you purchase ZoneAlarm Pro. Enforce ZoneAlarm Pro Security Check this box to enable ZoneAlarm Pro on the Router. This will require every PC to have ZoneAlarm Pro installed before being allowed to access the Internet (except for exempt computers). Enforcement Level This sets how often ZoneAlarm Pro will check for unau-

thorized intrusions. More Secure (default setting) enables ZoneAlarm Pro to check frequently. Conserve Bandwidth enables ZoneAlarm Pro to check less frequently; this uses less bandwidth. It is recommended to set the Enforcement Level at the More Secure setting unless there is a decrease in the Routers per-

formance. PC-cillin Settings If you have downloaded PC-cillin, complete this section. Enforce PC-cillin Anti-Virus Check this box to enable PC-cillin Anti-Virus on the Router. Exempt Computers If you wish to exempt any computers from enforcement of ZoneAlarm Pro and/or PC-cillin, complete this section. Enable/Disable To enable or disable computer exemptions, click Enable or Disable. From IP Address/To IP Address Enter the range of IP addresses for the computers you want to exempt from enforcement of ZoneAlarm Pro and/or PC-cillin. AOL Parental Controls Enabling this engages AOLs proprietary Parental Control feature. Enabling this will disable all options under the Advanced tab except MAC Address cloning. Note: AOL Parental Controls are available to AOL customers in the Unites States Only. To apply any of the settings you change on a page, click the Apply button. To can-

cel any values youve entered on any page, click the Cancel button. 34 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Help The Help tab, as shown in Figure 5-13, contains links to all of the Utilitys inter-

nal support documentation, a link to Linksyss website, and the application that upgrades the Routers firmware. To utility these links, you must have an active Internet connection. Important: In order to upgrade the Routers firmware, you must use Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher, or Netscape Navigator 4.7 or higher. Upgrading the firmware may cause the Router to be reset to the factory defaults. Make a record of all settings before attempting the upgrade. Figure 5-13 Click the Linksys Website link to connect to the Linksys homepage for Knowledgebase help files and information about other Linksys products. For an Online Manual in PDF format, click that text link. The manual will appear in Adobe PDF format. If you do not have the Adobe PDF Reader installed on your computer, click the Adobe Website link to download this software. Firmware can be upgraded by clicking the Upgrade Firmware link. Do not upgrade your firmware unless you are experiencing problems with the Access Point. To upgrade the Routers firmware:

1. Access the Help tab and click Upgrade Firmware. A new page, shown in Figure 5-14, will appear. Figure 5-14 2. Click the Browse button and find the firmware upgrade file that you downloaded from the Linksys website. Double-click the upgrade file. This will place the file into the File Path: field. 3. When the correct file is in the File Path: field, click the Upgrade but-

ton and follow the instructions there. This will complete your firmware upgrade. Filters Important: Do not interrupt the firmware upgrade process in any way or power down the Router while the upgrade is in progress as this could damage the Router. 35 36 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Advanced Tab: Filters Important: Filtering is an Advanced Function. No changes should be made to this tab without a thorough understanding of networking concepts. Filters block spe-

cific internal users from accessing the Internet. From the Filters as shown in Figure 5-

15, you can set up a filter through an IP address or a net-

work port number. tab, To filter users by network port number, enter a network port number or a range of network ports. Enter the port numbers you want to filter in the port numbers fields. Users connected to the Router will no longer be able to access any port number listed there. Editing MAC Filter Setting This feature filters the Ethernet adapters specific MAC address from going out to the Internet. To check your Ethernet adapters MAC address, run winipcfg or ipconfig in the command prompt, depending on which Windows operating system you are using. To set the MAC filter, click the Edit MAC Filter Setting button. When a second window appears, select the range in the drop-down menu, and in a MAC number field, enter the 12-digit MAC address you want to filter. Click the Apply button before closing the window. For infor-

mation on obtaining a MAC address, go to Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter. Blocking WAN Requests By enabling the Block WAN Request feature, you can prevent your network from being pinged, or detected, by other Internet users. The Block WAN Request feature also reinforces your network security by hiding your net-

work ports. Both functions of the Block WAN Request feature make it more difficult for outside users to work their way into your network. Click the Apply button to save your changes. Figure 5-15 Using Multicast Pass Through Setting Up Filters To set up a filter using IP addresses, enter the range of IP addresses you wish to filter in the IP address fields. Users who have filtered IP addresses will not be able to access the Internet at all. If you only want to filter one IP address instead of a range of IP addresses, enter the same value into both fields. For instance, if you wish to filter the PC with the IP address of 192.168.1.5, enter 5 into both fields on one line: 192.168.1.5 ~ 192.168.1.5. Click the Apply button when youre done. This feature allows for multiple transmissions to specific recipients at the same time. Select Enable to support the feature, or Disable to keep the Router from multicasting. 37 38 Using Multicast Pass Through Using Remote Upgrade Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch This feature allows you to upgrade the Routers firmware from a remote location. To enable Remote Upgrade, click on Enable, and then click the Apply button. Remote Management must be activated before you can man-

age the Router from a remote location. Important: Upgrading may cause the Router to be reset to the factory defaults. Make a record of all set-

tings before attempting the upgrade. Using MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) This feature specifies the largest packet size permitted for network trans-

mission. Select Enable and enter the value desired. It is recommended that you leave this value in the 1200 to 1500 range. For most DSL users, it is recommended to use the value 1492. By default, MTU is set at 1500 when disabled. This feature allows for multiple transmissions to specific recipients at the same time. Select Enable to support the feature, or Disable to keep the Router from multicasting. Using IPSec Pass Through This feature lets you use IPSec Pass Through. To use this feature, click the Enable button next to IPSec Pass Through, and then the Apply button. IPSec Pass Through is enabled by default. To disable IPSec Pass Through, click on Disable and then the Apply button. Using PPTP Pass Through Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol is the method used to enable VPN sessions. To enable this feature, click the Enable button next to PPTP Pass Through, and click the Apply button. PPTP Pass Through is enabled by default. To disable this feature, click on Disable next to PPTP Pass Through, and then the Apply button. Using Remote Management This feature allows you to manage the Router from a remote location, such as over the Internet. To enable this feature, click on Enable, and click the Apply button. Remote Management must be activated before you can man-

age the Router from a remote location. To disable Remote Management, click on Disable, and click the Apply but-

ton. If you wish to use this feature, enter http:\\<WAN IP Address>:8080 into your web browsers address field and press the Enter key. (Enter your specific WAN IP Address in place of <WAN IP Address>.) To disable this feature, click on Disable, and click the Apply button. 39 40 Advanced Tab: Port Range Forwarding 3. On the same line, select the protocol TCP or UDP, or select both protocols. Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Important:

Port Range Forwarding is an Advanced Function. No changes should be made to this tab without a thorough understanding of networking concepts. Port Range Forwarding from this tab, as shown in Figure 5-16, sets up public services on your network, such as web servers, ftp servers, e-

mail servers, or other specialized Internet a p p l i c a t i o n s .

(Specialized Internet applications are any applications that use Internet access to per-

form functions such as videoconferencing or online gaming. Some Internet applications may not require any forwarding.) When users send this type of request to your network via the Internet, the Router will forward those requests to the appropriate PC. Before using Forwarding, the DHCP function on the PC whose port is being forwarded must be disabled and have a new static IP address assigned because its IP address may change when using the DHCP function. Figure 5-16 If you need to forward all ports to one PC, see the DMZ section. To add a server using Port Range Forwarding:

1. Enter the name of the application in the appropriate Customized Applications field. 2. Next to the name of the application, enter the number or range of the external port(s) used by the server or Internet application in the Ext. Port column. Check with the Internet application software documentation for more information. 41 4. Enter the IP address of the server that you want the Internet users to be able to access. To find the IP address, go to Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter. 5. Check the Enable box to enable the services you have defined. Port Range Forwarding will not function if the Enable button is left unchecked. This is disabled (unchecked) by default. 6. Configure as many entries as neededthe Router supports up to 10 ranges of ports. Click the Apply button when you are done. UPnP Forwarding Clicking the UPnP Forwarding button on the Port Range Forwarding tab will display the UPnP Forwarding tab. The UPnP Forwarding tab, shown in Figure 5-17, displays preset application settings as well as options for customization of port services for other applications. This table is similar to the Port Forwarding table, but the items on this table will automat-

ically synchronize with other UPnP devices and operating systems, such as Windows XP. Figure 5-17 42 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch The Preset Applications are among the most widely used Internet applications that may require forwarding. They include the following:

FTP (File Transfer Protocol) A protocol used to transfer files over a TCP/IP network (Internet, UNIX, etc.). For example, after developing the HTML pages for a website on a local machine, they are typically uploaded to the web server using FTP. FTP includes functions to log onto the network, list directories, and copy files. It can also convert between the ASCII and EBCDIC character codes. FTP operations can be performed by typing com-

mands at a command prompt or via an FTP utility running under a graphical interface such as Windows. FTP transfers can also be initiated from within a web browser by entering the URL preceded by ftp://. Telnet A terminal emulation protocol commonly used on Internet and TCP/IP-based networks. It allows a user at a terminal or computer to log onto a remote device and run a program. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) The standard e-mail protocol on the Internet. It is a TCP/IP protocol that defines the message format and the message transfer agent (MTA), which stores and forwards the mail. DNS (Domain Name System) The way that Internet domain names are located and translated into IP addresses. A domain name is a meaningful and easy-to-remember handle for an Internet address. TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) A version of the TCP/IP FTP proto-

col that has no directory or password capability. Finger A UNIX command widely used on the Internet to find out informa-

tion about a particular user, such as a telephone number, whether the user is currently logged on, and the last time the user was logged on. The person being fingered must have placed his or her profile on the system in order for the information to be available. Fingering requires entering the full user@domain address. HTTP (HyperText Transport Protocol) The communications protocol used to connect to servers on the World Wide Web. Its primary function is to establish a connection with a web server and transmit HTML pages to the client web browser. POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) A standard mail server commonly used on the Internet. It provides a message store that holds incoming e-mail until users log on and download it. POP3 is a simple system with little selectivity. All pending messages and attachments are downloaded at the same time. POP3 uses the SMTP messaging protocol. NNTP (Network News Transfer Protocol) The protocol used to connect to Usenet groups on the Internet. Usenet newsreaders support the NNTP pro-

tocol. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) A widely used network monitoring and control protocol. Data is passed from SNMP agents, which are hardware and/or software processes reporting activity in each network device (hub, router, etc.) to the workstation console used to oversee the net-

work. The agents return information contained in a MIB (Management Information Base), which is a data structure that defines what is obtainable from the device and what can be controlled (turned off, on, etc.). You must check the Enable box to enable the applications you have defined. To add a server using UPnP Forwarding:

1. Enter the name of the application in the appropriate Application Name field. 2. Next to the name of the application, enter the number of the external port used by the server in the Ext. Port column. Check with the Internet appli-

cation software documentation for more information. 3. On the same line, select the protocol UDP or TCP. 4. Enter the number of the internal port used by the server in the Int. Port col-

umn. Check with the Internet application software documentation for more information. 5. Enter the IP address of the server that you want the Internet users to be able to access. To find the IP address, go to Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter. 6. Check the Enable box to enable the services you have defined. UPnP Forwarding will not function if the Enable button is left unchecked. This is disabled (unchecked) by default. 43 44 Port Triggering Advanced Tab: Dynamic Routing Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch From the Port Range Forwarding tab, shown in Figure 5-18, click the Port Triggering button to allow the Router to watch out-

going data for specific port numbers. The IP address of the comput-

the er that sends matching is data remembered by the Router, so that when the requested data returns through the Router, the data is pulled back to the proper computer by way of IP address and port mapping rules. Figure 5-18 1. Enter the Application Name of the trigger. 2. Enter the Trigger Port Range used by the application. Check with the Internet application for the port number needed. 3. Enter the Incoming Port Range used by the application. Check with the Internet application for the port number needed. 4. Click the Apply button. Important: Dynamic Routing is an Advanced Function. No changes should be made to this tab without a thorough under-

standing of networking concepts. From the Dynamic Routing tab, shown in Figure 5-19, you can automatically adjust to physical changes in the net-

works layout. The Router, using the R I P p r o t o c o l , determines the net-

work packets route based on the fewest number of hops between the source and the des-

tination. The RIP protocol regularly broadcasts routing information to other routers on the net-

work. To set up Dynamic Routing:

Figure 5-19 1. Choose the correct Working Mode. Gateway Mode should be used if the Router is hosting your networks connection to the Internet. Router Mode should be selected if the Router exists on a network with other routers. 2. In the TX field, choose the protocol by which you transmit data on the net-

work. 3. In the RX field, choose the protocol by which the Router receives network data. 4. Click the Apply button to save your changes. To view the Routing Table, which shows the network layout, click the Show Routing Table button. To clear any values youve entered on any page, click the Cancel button. To apply any settings youve altered on any page, click the Apply button. 45 46 Advanced Tab: Static Routing 2. Enter the following data to create a new static route:

Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Important: Static Routing is an Advanced Function. No changes should be made to this tab without a thorough under-

standing of networking concepts. Figure 5-20 If the Router is connected to more than one network, it may be necessary to set up a static route between them. This is set on the Static Routing tab, as shown in Figure 5-20. A static route is a pre-determined pathway that network infor-

mation must travel to reach a specific host or network. Click the Show Routing Table button to view the current static routing configuration. To create a static route entry:

1. Select Static Route Entry from the drop-down list. The Router supports up to 20 static route entries. Destination LAN IP. The Destination LAN IP is the address of the remote network or host to which you want to assign a static route. Enter the IP address of the host for which you wish to create a static route here. If you are building a route to an entire network, be sure that the host portion of the IP address is set to zero. For example, the Routers standard IP address is 192.168.1.1. Based on this address, the address of the network to which the Router is connected is 192.168.1. You would enter the IP address 192.168.1.0 if you wanted to route to the entire network, rather than just to the Router. Subnet Mask. The Subnet Mask indicates which portion of an IP address is the network portion and which portion is the host portion. If, for instance, you use a Subnet Mask of 255.255.255.0 with the example shown above for Destination LAN IP, then this would indicate that the first three numbers of an network IP address identifies this particular network, while the last number in the network address (from 1 to 254) would identify the specific host. Gateway IP. This IP address should be the IP address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the Router and the remote network or host. Hop Count. This value gives the number of nodes that a data packet pass-

es through before reaching its destination. A node is any device on the network, such as switches, PCs, etc. Interface. This interface tells you whether your network is on the internal LAN or the WAN, or the external Internet. If youre connecting to a sub-

network, select LAN. If youre connecting to another network through the Internet, select WAN. To delete a Static Routing entry, select an entry, and click the Delete this entry button. To clear any values youve entered on any page, click the Cancel button. To apply any settings youve altered on any page, click the Apply button. 47 48 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Advanced Tab: DMZ Host Advanced Tab: MAC Address Cloning Important: DMZ Hosting is an Advanced Function. No changes should be made to this tab without a thorough under-

standing of networking concepts. Important: MAC Address Cloning is an Advanced Function. No changes should be made to this tab without a thorough understanding of networking concepts. the MAC From Address Cloning tab, shown in Figure 5-22, you can assign the Router a MAC address, which is a 12-

digit code assigned to a unique piece of hardware for identifi-

cation, like a social security number. Some ISPs require that you register the MAC address of your network card/adapter, which was connected to your cable or DSL modem during installation. Therefore, in order to connect the Router to your cable or DSL modem in place of the PC (network card or adapter), you must change the Router MAC to duplicate (or clone) your network card/adapter MAC. You can find your adapter's MAC address by doing the following:

Figure 5-22 If you are running Windows 95, 98 or Millennium:

Go to Start, Run, type in command, and press Enter. At the DOS prompt, type winipcfg. If you are running Windows NT 4.0 or 2000:

Go to Start, Run, type in command, and press Enter. At the DOS prompt, type ipconfig /all. The Physical Address with 12 digits is your adapters MAC address. Enter those 12 digits into the MAC Address fields, and click Apply. This clones your network adapters MAC address onto the Router, and prevents you from having to call your ISP to change the registered MAC address to the adapters MAC address. Figure 5-21 The DMZ Hosting feature, accessed from the DMZ Host tab as shown in Figure 5-21, allows one local user to be exposed to the Internet for use of a spe-

cial-purpose service such as Internet gaming and videoconferencing. Whereas Port Range Forwarding can only forward a maximum of ten port ranges, DMZ hosting forwards all the ports at the same time to one PC. Before using this feature, the DHCP function on the PC whose port is being exposed must be disabled and have a new static IP address assigned because its IP address may change when using the DMZ function. To expose one PC, enter the computers IP address. To get the IP address of a computer, refer to Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter. Deactivate DMZ by entering a zero in the field. When finished, click the Apply button to save the settings. Otherwise, click the Cancel button to undo changes made on this screen. 49 50 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Advanced Tab: Wireless Important: Wireless is an Advanced Function. No changes should be made to this tab without a thorough understanding of networking concepts. to check Figure Before making any changes the Wireless tab, shown 5-23, in please the wireless settings for all your wireless PCs, these changes will alter the Routers effective-

ness. In most cases, these settings do not need to be changed. as Figure 5-23 Firmware Version. This indicates the Routers firmware version. Beacon Interval. This value indicates the frequency interval of the beacon. A beacon is a packet broadcast by the Router to keep the network synchro-

nized. A beacon includes the wireless LAN service area, the IP address, the Broadcast destination addresses, a time stamp, Delivery Traffic Indicator Maps, and the Traffic Indicator Message (TIM). RTS Threshold. This value should remain at its default setting of 2,346. Should you encounter inconsistent data flow, only minor modifications are recommended. Fragmentation Threshold. This value indicates how much of the Routers resources are devoted to recovering packet errors. The value should remain at its default setting of 2,346. If you have decreased this value and experi-

ence high packet error rates, you can increase it again, but it will likely decrease overall network performance. Only minor modifications of this value are recommended. DTIM Interval. This value indicates the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM). A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast mes-

sages. When the Router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients, it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value. Clients for the Router hear the beacons and awaken to receive the broadcast and multicast messages. Basic Rates. The basic transfer rates should be set depending on the speed of your wireless network. You must select 1-2 (Mbps) if you have older 802.11 compliant equipment on your network, such as wireless adapters that support only 1 or 2 Mbps. Selecting 1-2 (Mbps), however, does not limit the basic transfer rates of faster adapters. TX Rates. Select all the supported rates at which an access point will com-

municate with a client. Preamble Type. The preamble defines the length of the CRC block for communication between the Router and the roaming Network Card. (High network traffic areas should use the shorter preamble type.) Select the appropriate preamble type and click the Apply button to set it. Authentication Type. You may choose between Open System, Shared Key, and Both. The Authentication Type default is set to Open System, in which the sender and the recipient do NOT share a secret key. Each party generates its own key-pair and asks the receiver to accept the randomly-

generated key. Once accepted, this key is used for a short time only. Then a new key is generated and agreed upon. Shared Key is when both the sender and the recipient share a secret key. Antenna Selection. This selection is for choosing which antenna transmits data. By default, the Diversity Antenna selection, used to increase recep-

tion, is chosen. 51 52 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Station MAC Filter. This option will allow you to prevent wireless users on your network from accessing the Routers functions. Clicking the Active MAC Table button will display the MAC Addresses of all users on your wireless network. Addresses in green show access to the Router, while addresses in red do not have access. To filter users, click the Edit MAC Filter Setting button. The window shown in Figure 5-24 will appear. Figure 5-23 Click the Wireless MAC Entry drop-down menu to select a range of entries for your network. From within this range, select the entry for which youd like to manage access. Verify that the appropriate MAC Address is entered into the MAC Address field. Click the Filter checkbox beside that MAC Address. Now, this user will be prevented from accessing the Router. All other users will have access. To allow only that user and deny access to all others, leave Filter unchecked. Click the Apply button to set these changes or Undo if you do not wish these changes to go into effect. When finished with the Wireless Tab, click the Apply button to save the set-

tings. Otherwise, click the Cancel button to undo changes made on this screen. 53 Appendix A: Troubleshooting Common Problems and Solutions This appendix consists of two parts: Common Problems and Solutions and Frequently Asked Questions. Provided are possible solutions to problems regarding the installation and operation of the Router. If your situation is described here, the problem should be solved by applying the corresponding solution. If you cant find an answer here, check the Linksys website at www.linksys.com. 1. I need to set a static IP address on a PC. The Router, by default, assigns an IP address range of 192.168.1.100 to 192.168.1.150 using the DHCP server on the Router. To set a static IP address, you can only use the ranges 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.99 and 192.168.1.151 to 192.168.1.254. Each PC or network device that uses TCP/IP must have a unique address to identify itself in a network. If the IP address is not unique to a network, Windows will generate an IP conflict error message. You can assign a static IP address to a PC by performing the following steps:

For Windows 95, 98, and Me:

A. Click Start, Settings, and Control Panel. Double-click Network. B. In The following network components are installed box, select the TCP/IP->

associated with your Ethernet adapter. If you only have one Ethernet adapter installed, you will only see one TCP/IP line with no association to an Ethernet adapter. Highlight it and click the Properties button. C. In the TCP/IP properties window, select the IP address tab, and select Specify an IP address. Enter a unique IP address that is not used by any other com-

puter on the network connected to the Router. You can only use an IP address in to 192.168.1.254. Make sure that each IP address is unique for each PC or net-

work device. to 192.168.1.99 and 192.168.1.151 the ranges 192.168.1.2 D. Click the Gateway tab, and in the New Gateway prompt, enter 192.168.1.1, which is the default IP address of the Router. Click the Add button to accept the entry. E. Click the DNS tab, and make sure the DNS Enabled option is selected. Enter the Host and Domain names (e.g., John for Host and home for Domain). Enter the DNS entry provided by your ISP. If your ISP has not provided the DNS IP address, contact your ISP to get that information or go to its website for the information. F. Click the OK button in the TCP/IP properties window, and click Close or the OK button for the Network window. G. Restart the computer when asked. 54 For Windows 2000:

For Windows XP:

Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch A. Click Start, Settings, and Control Panel. Double-click Network and Dial-Up Connections. B. Right-click the Local Area Connection that is associated with the Ethernet adapter you are using, and select the Properties option. C. In the Components checked are used by this connection box, highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click the Properties button. Select Use the following IP address option. D. Enter a unique IP address that is not used by any other computer on the network connected to the Router. You can only use an IP address in the ranges 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.99 and 192.168.1.151 to 192.168.1.254. E. Enter the Subnet Mask, 255.255.255.0. F. Enter the Default Gateway, 192.168.1.1 (Routers default IP address). G. Toward the bottom of the window, select Use the following DNS server addresses, and enter the Preferred DNS server and Alternative DNS server (provided by your ISP). Contact your ISP or go on its website to find the information. H. Click the OK button in the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window, and click the OK button in the Local Area Connection Properties window. I. Restart the computer if asked. For Windows NT 4.0:

A. Click Start, Settings, and Control Panel. Double-click the Network icon. B. Click the Protocol tab, and double-click TCP/IP Protocol. C. When the window appears, make sure you have selected the correct Adapter for your Ethernet adapter. D. Select Specify an IP address, and enter a unique IP address that is not used by any other computer on the network connected to the Router. You can only use an IP address in the ranges 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.99 and 192.168.1.151 to 192.168.1.254. E. Enter the Subnet Mask, 255.255.255.0. F. Enter the Default Gateway, 192.168.1.1 (Routers default IP address). G. Click the DNS tab, and enter the Host and Domain names (e.g., John for Host and home for Domain). Under DNS Service Search Order, click the Add button. Enter the DNS IP address in the DNS Server field, and click the Add button. Repeat this action for all DNS IP addresses given by your ISP. H. Click the OK button in the TCP/IP Protocol Properties window, and click the Close button in the Network window. I. Restart the computer if asked. The following instructions assume you are running Windows XP with the default interface. If you are using the Classic interface (where the icons and menus look like previous Windows versions), please follow the instructions for Windows 2000. A. Click Start and Control Panel. B. Click the Network and Internet Connections icon and then the Network Connections icon. C. Right-click the Local Area Connection that is associated with the Ethernet adapter you are using, and select the Properties option. D. In the This connection uses the following items box, highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Click the Properties button. E. Enter a unique IP address that is not used by any other computer on the net-

work connected to the Router. You can only use an IP address in the ranges 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.99 and 192.168.1.151 to 192.168.1.254. F. Enter the Subnet Mask, 255.255.255.0. G. Enter the Default Gateway, 192.168.1.1 (Routers default IP address). H. Toward the bottom of the window, select Use the following DNS server addresses, and enter the Preferred DNS server and Alternative DNS server

(provided by your ISP). Contact your ISP or go on its website to find the infor-

mation. I. Click the OK button in the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. Click the OK button in the Local Area Connection Properties window. 2. I want to test my Internet connection. A. Check your TCP/IP settings. For Windows 95, 98, and Me:

Refer to your Ethernet adapters documentation for details. Make sure Obtain IP address automatically is selected in the settings. For Windows 2000:

Click Start, Settings, and Control Panel. Double-click Network and Dial-

Up Connections. Right-click the Local Area Connection that is associated with the Ethernet adapter you are using, and select the Properties option. In the Components checked are used by this connection box, highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click the Properties button. Make sure that Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically are selected. 55 56 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Click the OK button in the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties win-

dow, and click the OK button in the Local Area Connection Properties window. Restart the computer if asked. For Windows XP:

The following instructions assume you are running Windows XP with the default interface. If you are using the Classic interface (where the icons and menus look like previous Windows versions), please follow the instructions for Windows 2000. Click Start and Control Panel. Click the Network and Internet Connections icon and then the Network Connections icon. Right-click the Local Area Connection that is associated with the Ethernet adapter you are using, and select the Properties option. In the This connection uses the following items box, highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click the Properties button. Make sure that Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically are selected. Click the OK button in the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties win-

dow, and click the OK button in the Local Area Connection Properties window. Restart the computer if asked. For Windows NT 4.0:

Click Start, Settings, and Control Panel. Double-click the Network icon. Click the Protocol tab, and double-click on TCP/IP Protocol. When the window appears, make sure you have selected the correct Adapter for your Ethernet adapter and set it for Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server. Click the OK button in the TCP/IP Protocol Properties window, and click the Close button in the Network window. Restart the computer if asked. B. Open a command prompt. For Windows 95, 98, and Me, please click Start and Run. In the Open field, type in command. Press the Enter key or click the OK button. For Windows NT, 2000, and XP, please click Start and Run. In the Open field, type cmd. Press the Enter key or click the OK button. C. In the command prompt, type ping 192.168.1.1 and press the Enter key. If you get a reply, the computer is communicating with the Router. If you do NOT get a reply, please check the cable, and make sure Obtain an IP address automatically is selected in the TCP/IP settings for your Ethernet adapter. D. In the command prompt, type ping followed by your WAN IP address and press the Enter key. The WAN IP Address can be found in the web inter-

face of the Router. For example, if your WAN IP address is 1.2.3.4, you would enter ping 1.2.3.4 and press the Enter key. If you get a reply, the computer is connected to the Router. If you do NOT get a reply, try the ping command from a different com-

puter to verify that your original computer is not the cause of the prob-

lem. E. In the command prompt, type ping www.yahoo.com and press the Enter key. If you get a reply, the computer is connected to the Internet. If you can-

not open a webpage, try the ping command from a different computer to verify that your original computer is not the cause of the problem. If you do NOT get a reply, there may be a problem with the connection. Try the ping command from a different computer to verify that your orig-

inal computer is not the cause of the problem. 3. I am not getting an IP address on the WAN with my Internet connection. A. Refer to Problem #2, I want to test my Internet connection to verify that you have connectivity. B. If you need to register the MAC address of your Ethernet adapter with your ISP, please see Appendix F: Finding the MAC address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter. If you need to clone the MAC address of your Ethernet adapter onto the Router, see the MAC Address Clone section of Chapter 5: Using the Routers Web-based Utility for details. C. Make sure you are using the right WAN settings. Contact your ISP to see if your WAN connection type is DHCP, Static IP Address, or PPPoE (com-

monly used by DSL consumers). Please refer to the Setup section of Chapter 5: Using the Routers Web-based Utility for details on WAN set-

tings. D. Make sure you have the right cable. Check to see if the WAN column has a solidly lit Link LED. E. Make sure the cable connecting from your cable or DSL modem is con-

nected to the Routers WAN port. Verify that the Status page of the Routers web interface shows a valid IP address from your ISP. 57 58 F. Turn off the computer, Router, and cable/DSL modem. Wait 30 seconds, and then turn on the Router, cable/DSL modem, and computer. Check the Status tab of the Routers web-based utility to see if you get an IP address. Your VPN may require port 500/UDP packets to be passed to the computer that is connecting to the IPSec server. Refer to Problem #7, I need to set up online game hosting or use other Internet applications for details. Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch 4. I am not able to access the Routers web interface Setup page. A. Refer to Problem #2, I want to test my Internet connection to verify that your computer is properly connected to the Router. B. Refer to Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP address for Your Ethernet Adapter to verify that your computer has an IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS. C. Set a static IP address on your system; refer to Problem #1: I need to set a static IP address. D. Refer to Problem #10: I need to remove the proxy settings or the dial-up pop-up window (for PPPoE users). 5. I cant get my Virtual Private Network (VPN) working through the Router. Access the Routers web interface by going to http://192.168.1.1 or the IP address of the Router, and go to the Advanced => Filter tab. Make sure you have IPsec pass-through and/or PPTP pass-through enabled. VPNs that use IPSec with the ESP (Encapsulation Security Payload known as protocol 50) authentication will work fine. At least one IPSec session will work through the Router; however, simultaneous IPSec sessions may be possible, depending on the specifics of your VPNs. VPNs that use IPSec and AH (Authentication Header known as protocol 51) are incompatible with the Router. AH has limitations due to occasional incom-

patibility with the NAT standard. Change the IP address for the Router to another subnet to avoid a conflict between the VPN IP address and your local IP address. For example, if your VPN server assigns an IP address 192.168.1.X (X is a number from 1 to 254) and your local LAN IP address is 192.168.1.X (X is the same number used in the VPN IP address), the Router will have difficulties routing information to the right location. If you change the Routers IP address to 192.168.2.1, that should solve the problem. Change the Routers IP address through the Setup tab of the web interface. If you assigned a static IP address to any computer or net-

work device on the network, you need to change its IP address accordingly to 192.168.2.Y (Y being any number from 1 to 254). Note that each IP address must be unique within the network. Check the Linksys website for more information at www.linksys.com. 6. I need to set up a server behind my Router. To use a server like a web, ftp, or mail server, you need to know the respective port numbers they are using. For example, port 80 (HTTP) is used for web;

port 21 (FTP) is used for FTP, and port 25 (SMTP outgoing) and port 110

(POP3 incoming) are used for the mail server. You can get more information by viewing the documentation provided with the server you installed. Follow these steps to set up port forwarding through the Routers web-based utility. We will be setting up web, ftp, and mail servers. A. Access the Routers web-based utility by going to http://192.168.1.1 or the IP address of the Router. Go to the Advanced => Forwarding tab. B. Enter any name you want to use for the Customized Application. C. Enter the Ext. Port range of the service you are using. For example, if you have a web server, you would enter the range 80 to 80. D. Check the protocol you will be using, TCP and/or UDP. E. Enter the IP address of the PC or network device that you want the port server to go to. For example, if the web servers Ethernet adapter IP address is 192.168.1.100, you would enter 100 in the field provided. Check Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter for details on getting an IP address. F. Check the Enable option for the port services you want to use. Consider the example below:

Ext. Port Customized Application 80 to 80 Web server FTP server 21 to 21 SMTP (outgoing) 25 to 25 POP3 (incoming) 110 to 110 TCP UDP IP Address Enable X X X X X X X 192.168.1.100 192.168.1.101 192.168.1.102 192.168.1.102 X X X X When you have completed the configuration, click the Apply button. 59 60 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch 7. I need to set up online game hosting or use other Internet applications. If you want to play online games or use Internet applications, most will work without doing any port forwarding or DMZ hosting. There may be cases when you want to host an online game or Internet application. This would require you to set up the Router to deliver incoming packets or data to a specific com-

puter. This also applies to the Internet applications you are using. The best way to get the information on what port services to use is to go to the website of the online game or application you want to use. Follow these steps to set up online game hosting or use a certain Internet application:

A. Access the Routers web interface by going to http://192.168.1.1 or the IP address of the Router. Go to the Advanced => Forwarding tab. B. Enter any name you want to use for the Customized Application. C. Enter the Ext. Port range of the service you are using. For example, if you want to host Unreal Tournament (UT), you would enter the range 7777 to 27900. D. Check the protocol you will be using, TCP and/or UDP. E. Enter the IP address of the PC or network device that you want the port server to go to. For example, if the web servers Ethernet adapter IP address is 192.168.1.100, you would enter 100 in the field provided. Check Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter for details on getting an IP address. F. Check the Enable option for the port services you want to use. Consider the example below:

Customized Application UT Halflife PC Anywhere VPN IPSEC Ext. Port TCP UDP IP Address Enable 7777 to 27900 X 27015 to 27015 X 5631 to 5631 500 to 500 X X X X 192.168.1.100 192.168.1.105 192.168.1.102 192.168.1.100 X X X X When you have completed the configuration, click the Apply button. 8. I cant get the Internet game, server, or application to work. If you are having difficulties getting any Internet game, server, or application to function properly, consider exposing one PC to the Internet using DeMilitarized Zone (DMZ) hosting. This option is available when an applica-

tion requires too many ports or when you are not sure which port services to use. Make sure you disable all the forwarding entries if you want to success-

fully use DMZ hosting, since forwarding has priority over DMZ hosting. (In other words, data that enters the Router will be checked first by the forwarding settings. If the port number that the data enters from does not have port for-

warding, then the Router will send the data to whichever PC or network device you set for DMZ hosting.) Follow these steps to set DMZ hosting:

A. Access the Routers web-based utility by going to http://192.168.1.1 or the IP address of the Router. Go to the Advanced => Forwarding tab. B. Disable or remove the entries you have entered for forwarding. Keep this information in case you want to use it at a later time. C. Click the DMZ Host tab. D. Enter the Ethernet adapters IP address of the computer you want exposed to the Internet. This will bypass the NAT firewall for that computer. Please refer to Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter for details on getting an IP address. Once completed with the configuration, click the Apply button. 9. I forgot my password, or the password prompt always appears when saving set-

tings to the Router. Reset the Router to factory default by pressing the Reset button for 30 seconds and then releasing it. If you are still getting prompted for a password when sav-

ing settings, then perform the following steps:

A. Access the Routers web interface by going to http://192.168.1.1 or the IP address of the Router. Enter the default password admin, and click the Password tab. B. Enter a different password in the Router Password field, and enter the same password in the second field to confirm the password. C. Click the Apply button. 61 62 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch 10. I am a PPPoE user, and I need to remove the proxy settings or the dial-up pop-

up window. If you have proxy settings, you need to disable these on your computer. Because the Router is the gateway for the Internet connection, the computer does not need any proxy settings to gain access. Please follow these directions to verify that you do not have any proxy settings and that the browser you use is set to connect directly to the LAN. For Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher:

A. Click Start, Settings, and Control Panel. Double-click Internet Options. B. Click the Connections tab. C. Click the LAN settings button and remove anything that is checked. D. Click the OK button to go back to the previous screen. E. Click the option Never dial a connection. This will remove any dial-up pop-ups for PPPoE users. For Netscape 4.7 or higher:

A. Start Netscape Navigator, and click Edit, Preferences, Advanced, and Proxies. B. Make sure you have Direct connection to the Internet selected on this screen. C. Close all the windows to finish. 11. To start over, I need to set the Router to factory default. Hold the Reset button for up to 30 seconds and then release it. This will return the password, forwarding, and other settings on the Router to the factory default settings. In other words, the Router will revert to its original factory configuration. 12. I need to upgrade the firmware. In order to upgrade the firmware with the latest features, you need to go to the Linksys website and download the latest firmware at www.linksys.com. Follow these steps:

13. The firmware upgrade failed, and/or the Diag LED is flashing. The upgrade could have failed for a number of reasons. Follow these steps to upgrade the firmware and/or make the Diag LED stop flashing:

A. If the firmware upgrade failed, use the TFTP program (it was downloaded along with the firmware). Open the pdf that was downloaded along with the firmware and TFTP program, and follow the pdfs instructions. B. Set a static IP address on the PC; refer to Problem #1, I need to set a stat-

ic IP address. Use the following IP address settings for the computer you are using:

IP Address: 192.168.1.50 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Gateway: 192.168.1.1 C. Perform the upgrade using the TFTP program or the Routers web-based utility through its Help tab. 14. My DSL services PPPoE is always disconnecting. PPPoE is not actually a dedicated or always-on connection. The DSL ISP can disconnect the service after a period of inactivity, just like a normal phone dial-

up connection to the Internet. There is a setup option to keep alive the con-

nection. This may not always work, so you may need to re-establish connec-

tion periodically. A. To connect to the Router, go to the web browser, and enter http://192.168.1.1 or the IP address of the Router. B. Enter the password , if asked. (The default password is admin.) C. In the Setup tab, select the option Keep Alive, and set the Redial Period option at 20 (seconds). D. Click the Apply button. E. Click the Status tab, and click the Connect button. F. You may see the login status display as Connecting. Press the F5 key to refresh the screen, until you see the login status display as Connected. A. Go to the Linksys website at http://www.linksys.com and download the G. Click the Apply button to continue. latest firmware. B. To upgrade the firmware, follow the steps in the Help section found in If the connection is lost again, follow steps E to G to re-establish connection. Chapter 5: Using the Routers Web-based Utility. 63 64 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch 15. I can't access my email, web, or VPN, or I am getting corrupted data from the Internet. The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) setting may need to be adjusted. By default, the MTU is set at 1500. For most DSL users, it is strongly recom-

mended to use MTU 1492. If you are having some difficulties, perform the fol-

lowing steps:

A. To connect to the Router, go to the web browser, and enter http://192.168.1.1 or the IP address of the Router. B. Enter the password, if asked. (The default password is admin.) C. Click the Advanced => Filter tab. D. Look for the MTU option, and select Enable. In the Size field, enter 1492. E. Click the Apply button to continue. If your difficulties continue, change the Size to different values. Try this list of values, one value at a time, in this order, until your problem is solved:

1462 1400 1362 1300 16. I need to use port triggering. Port triggering looks at the outgoing port services used and will trigger the Router to open a specific port, depending on which port an Internet application uses. Follow these steps:

A. To connect to the Router, go to the web browser, and enter http://192.168.1.1 or the IP address of the Router. B. Enter the password, if asked. (The default password is admin.) C. Click the Advanced => Forwarding tab, and click the Port Trigger button. D. Enter any name you want to use for the Application Name. E. Enter the Triggered Port Range. Check with your Internet application provider for more information on which outgoing port services it is using. F. Enter the Incoming Port Range. Check with your Internet Application provider for more information on which incoming port services are required by the Internet application. 17. The Diag LED stays lit continuously. The Diag LED lights up when the device is first powered up. Meantime, the system will boot up itself and check for proper operation. After fin-

ishing the checking procedure, the LED turns off to show that the system is working fine. If the LED remains lit after this time, the device is not working properly. Try to flash the firmware by assigning a static IP address to the computer, and then upgrade the firmware. Try using the following settings, IP Address: 192.168.1.50 and Subnet Mask:

255.255.255.0. 18. When I enter a URL or IP address, I get a time-out error or am prompted to retry. Check if other PCs work. If they do, ensure that your workstations IP set-

tings are correct (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, and DNS). Restart the computer that is having a problem. If the PCs are configured correctly, but still not working, check the Router. Ensure that it is connected and ON. Connect to it and check its settings. (If you cannot connect to it, check the LAN and power connec-

tions.) If the Router is configured correctly, check your Internet connection

(DSL/cable modem, etc.) to see if it is working correctly. You can remove the Router to verify a direct connection. Manually configure the TCP/IP with a DNS address provided by your ISP. Make sure that your browser is set to connect directly and that any dial-

up is disabled. For Internet Explorer, click Tools , Internet Options, and then the Connection tab. Make sure that Internet Explorer is set to Never dial a connection. For Netscape Navigator, click Edit, Preferences, Advanced, and Proxy. Make sure that Netscape Navigator is set to Direct connection to the Internet. 19. The Full/Col LED keeps flickering continuously. Check the Category 5 Ethernet cable and its RJ-45 connectors. There may be interference with other network devices. Try removing other PCs or network devices to see if the problem persists. Eliminate each network device one at a time to determine the cause. 65 66 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Frequently Asked Questions What is the maximum number of IP addresses that the Router will support? The Router will support up to 253 IP addresses. Is IPSec Pass-Through supported by the Router? Yes, it is a built-in feature that the Router automatically enables. Where is the Router installed on the network? In a typical environment, the Router is installed between the cable/DSL modem and the LAN. Plug the Router into the cable/DSL modems Ethernet port. Does the Router support IPX or AppleTalk? No. TCP/IP is the only protocol stan-

dard for the Internet and has become the global standard for communications. IPX, a NetWare communications protocol used only to route messages from one node to another, and AppleTalk, a communications protocol used on Apple and Macintosh networks, can be used for LAN to LAN connections, but those protocols cannot connect from WAN to LAN. Does the WAN connection of the Router support 100 Mbps Ethernet? Because of the speed limitations of broadband Internet connections, the Routers current hardware design supports 10 Mbps Ethernet on its WAN port. It does, of course, support 100 Mbps over the auto-sensing Fast Ethernet 10/100 switch on the LAN side of the Router. What is Network Address Translation and what is it used for? Network Address Translation (NAT) translates multiple IP addresses on the private LAN to one public address that is sent out to the Internet. This adds a level of security since the address of a PC connected to the private LAN is never transmitted on the Internet. Furthermore, NAT allows the Router to be used with low cost Internet accounts, such as DSL or cable modems, when only one TCP/IP address is provided by the ISP. The user may have many private addresses behind this single address provided by the ISP. Does the Router support any operating system other than Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT, or Windows XP? Yes, but Linksys does not, at this time, provide technical support for setup, configuration or troubleshoot-

ing of any non-Windows operating systems. Does the Router support ICQ send file? Yes, with the following fix: click ICQ menu -> preference -> connections tab->, and check I am behind a fire-

wall or proxy. Then set the firewall time-out to 80 seconds in the firewall set-

ting. The Internet user can then send a file to a user behind the Router. I set up an Unreal Tournament Server, but others on the LAN cannot join. What do I need to do? If you have a dedicated Unreal Tournament server running, you need to create a static IP for each of the LAN computers and forward ports 7777, 7778, 7779, 7780, 7781, and 27900 to the IP address of the server. You can also use a port forwarding range of 7777 ~ 27900. If you want to use the UT Server Admin, forward another port (8080 usually works well but is used for remote admin. You may have to disable this.), and then in the

[UWeb.WebServer] section of the server.ini file, set the ListenPort to 8080 (to match the mapped port above) and ServerName to the IP assigned to the Router from your ISP. Can multiple gamers on the LAN get on one game server and play simultaneously with just one public IP address? It depends on which network game or what kind of game server you are using. For example, Unreal Tournament supports multi-login with one public IP. How do I get Half-Life: Team Fortress to work with the Router? The default client port for Half-Life is 27005. The computers on your LAN need to have

+clientport 2700x added to the HL shortcut command line; the x would be 6, 7, 8, and on up. This lets multiple computers connect to the same server. One problem: Version 1.0.1.6 wont let multiple computers with the same CD key connect at the same time, even if on the same LAN (not a problem with 1.0.1.3). As far as hosting games, the HL server does not need to be in the DMZ. Just forward port 27015 to the local IP address of the server comput-

er. How can I block corrupted FTP downloads? If you are experiencing corrupted files when you download a file with your FTP client, try using another FTP program. The web page hangs; downloads are corrupt, or nothing but junk characters are being displayed on the screen. What do I need to do? Force your Ethernet adapter to 10Mbps or half duplex mode, and turn off the Auto-negotiate feature of your Ethernet adapter as a temporary measure. (Please look at the Network Control Panel in your Ethernet adapters Advanced Properties tab.) 67 68 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Make sure that your proxy setting is disabled in the browser. Check our web-

site at www.linksys.com for more information. If all else fails in the installation, what can I do? Reset the Router by holding down the reset button until the Diag LED fully turns on and off. Reset your cable or DSL modem by powering the unit off and then on. Obtain and flash the latest firmware release that is readily available on the Linksys website, www.linksys.com. How will I be notified of new Router firmware upgrades? All Linksys firmware upgrades are posted on the Linksys website at www.linksys.com, where they can be downloaded for free. The Routers firmware can be upgraded with TFTP programs. If the Routers Internet connection is working well, there is no need to download a newer firmware version, unless that version contains new features that you would like to use. Downloading a more current version of Router firmware will not enhance the quality or speed of your Internet con-

nection, and may disrupt your current connection stability. Will the Router function in a Macintosh environment? Yes, but the Routers setup pages are accessible only through Internet Explorer 4.0 or Netscape Navigator 4.0 or higher for Macintosh. I am not able to get the web configuration screen for the Router. What can I do?

You may have to remove the proxy settings on your Internet browser, e.g., Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer. Or remove the dial-up settings on your browser. Check with your browser documentation, and make sure that your browser is set to connect directly and that any dial-up is disabled. Make sure that your browser is set to connect directly and that any dial-up is dis -

abled. For Internet Explorer, click Tools , Internet Options, and then the Connection tab. Make sure that Internet Explorer is set to Never dial a con-

nection. For Netscape Navigator, click Edit, Preferences, Advanced, and Proxy. Make sure that Netscape Navigator is set to Direct connection to the Internet. What is DMZ Hosting? Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) allows one IP address (com-

puter) to be exposed to the Internet. Some applications require multiple TCP/IP ports to be open. It is recommended that you set your computer with a static IP if you want to use DMZ Hosting. To get the LAN IP address, see Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter. If DMZ Hosting is used, does the exposed user share the public IP with the Router?

No. 69 Does the Router pass PPTP packets or actively route PPTP sessions? The Router allows PPTP packets to pass through. Is the Router cross-platform compatible? Any platform that supports Ethernet and TCP/IP is compatible with the Router. How many ports can be simultaneously forwarded? Theoretically, the Router can establish 520 sessions at the same time, but you can only forward 10 ranges of ports. Does the Router replace a modem? Is there a cable or DSL modem in the Router?

No, this version of the Router must work in conjunction with a cable or DSL modem. Which modems are compatible with the Router? The Router is compatible with virtually any cable or DSL modem that supports Ethernet. What are the advanced features of the Router? The Routers advanced features include IP Filtering, Port Range Forwarding, Dynamic Routing, Static Routing, DMZ hosting, and MAC Address Cloning. What is the maximum number of VPN sessions allowed by the Router?

The maximum number depends on many factors. At least one IPSec session will work through the Router; however, simultaneous IPSec sessions may be possible, depending on the specifics of your VPNs. How big is the memory buffer on the Router? 1MB buffer and 512KB flash. How can I check whether I have static or DHCP IP Addresses? Consult your ISP to obtain this information. How do I get mIRC to work with the Router? Under the Port Range Forwarding tab, set port forwarding to 113 for the PC on which you are using mIRC. Can the Router act as my DHCP Server? Yes. The Router has DHCP Server soft-

ware built-in. Can I run an application from a remote computer over the wireless network? This will depend on whether or not the application is designed to be used over a 70 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch network. Consult the applications documentation to determine if it supports operation over a network. What is the IEEE 802.11b standard? The IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN standards subcommittee formulates the standard for the industry. The objective is to enable wireless LAN hardware from different manufacturers to communicate. What IEEE 802.11 features are supported? The product supports the following IEEE 802.11 functions:

CSMA/CA plus Acknowledge protocol Multi-Channel Roaming Automatic Rate Selection RTS/CTS feature Fragmentation Power Management What is BSS ID? A specific Ad-hoc LAN is called a Basic Service Set (BSS). Computers in a BSS must be configured with the same BSS ID. What is SSID? An Infrastructure configuration could also support roaming capability for mobile workers. More than one BSS can be configured as an Extended Service Set (ESS). Users within an ESS could roam freely between BSSs while maintaining a continuous connection to the wireless network sta-

tions and Access Points. What is ISM band? The FCC and their counterparts outside of the U.S. have set aside bandwidth for unlicensed use in the ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band. This presents a truly revolutionary opportunity to place con-

venient high speed wireless capabilities in the hands of users around the globe. What is Spread Spectrum? Spread Spectrum technology is a wideband radio frequency technique developed by the military for use in reliable, secure, mis -

sion-critical communications systems. It is designed to trade off bandwidth efficiency for reliability, integrity, and security. In other words, more band-

width is consumed than in the case of narrowband transmission, but the trade-

off produces a signal that is, in effect, louder and thus easier to detect, pro-

vided that the receiver knows the parameters of the spread-spectrum signal being broadcast. If a receiver is not tuned to the right frequency, a spread-

spectrum signal looks like background noise. There are two main alternatives, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) and Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS). What is DSSS? What is FHSS? And what are their differences? Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) uses a narrowband carrier that changes frequency in a pattern that is known to both transmitter and receiver. Properly synchronized, the net effect is to maintain a single logical channel. To an unintended receiver, FHSS appears to be short-duration impulse noise. Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) generates a redundant bit pattern for each bit to be transmitted. This bit pattern is called a chip (or chipping code). The longer the chip, the greater the probability that the original data can be recov-

ered. Even if one or more bits in the chip are damaged during transmission, statistical techniques embedded in the radio can recover the original data without the need for retransmission. To an unintended receiver, DSSS appears as low power wideband noise and is rejected (ignored) by most narrowband receivers. Would the information be intercepted while transmitting on air? WLAN features two-fold protection in security. On the hardware side, as with Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum technology, it has the inherent security feature of scrambling. On the software side, the WLAN series offers the encryption function (WEP) to enhance security and access control. Users can set it up depending upon their needs. What is WEP? WEP is Wired Equivalent Privacy, a data privacy mechanism based on a 40/64 bit shared key algorithm, as described in the IEEE 802.11 standard. What is a MAC Address? The Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique number assigned by the manufacturer to any Ethernet networking device, such as a network adapter, that allows the network to identify it at the hard-

ware level. For all practical purposes, this number is usually permanent. Unlike IP addresses, which can change every time a computer logs on to the network, the MAC address of a device stays the same, making it a valuable identifier for the network. If your questions are not addressed here, refer to the Linksys website, www.linksys.com. 71 72 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Appendix B: How to Ping Your ISPs E-mail and Web Addresses Virtually all Internet addresses are configured with words or characters (i.e., www.linksys.com, www.yahoo.com, etc.) In actuality, however, these Internet addresses are assigned to IP addresses, which are the true addresses on the Internet. For example, www.linksys.com is actually 216.23.162.142. Entering that into your web browser will bring up at the Linksys home page every time. IP and web addresses, however, can sometimes be long and hard to remember. Because of this, certain ISPs will shorten their server addresses to single words or codes on their users web browser or e-mail configurations. If your ISPs e-

mail and web server addresses are configured with single words (www, e-

mail, home, pop3, etc.) rather than whole Internet Addresses or IP Addresses, the Router may have problems sending or receiving mail and accessing the Internet. This happens because the Router has not been config-

ured by your ISP to accept their abbreviated server addresses. The solution is to determine the true web addresses behind your ISPs code words. You can determine the IP and web addresses of your ISPs servers by pinging them. Note: If you dont have your ISPs web and e-mail IP addresses, you must either get them from your ISP or follow these steps prior to connecting the Router to your network. Step One: Pinging an IP Address The first step to determining your ISPs web and e-mail server address is to ping its IP address. 1. Power on the computer and the cable or DSL modem, and restore the network configuration set by your ISP if you have since changed it. 2. Click Start, then Run, and type command. This will bring up the DOS window. 3. At the DOS command prompt, type ping mail (assuming that the loca-

tion for which youre trying to find an IP address is configured as mail). Press Enter. Information such as the following data, taken from a ping of Microsoft Networks e-mail server, will be displayed. C:\>ping mail Pinging mail [24.53.32.4] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 24.53.32.4: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128 Reply from 24.53.32.4: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128 Reply from 24.53.32.4: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128 Reply from 24.53.32.4: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128 Ping statistics for 24.53.32.4:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0%

loss), Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:

Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms 4. Write down the IP address returned by the ping command. (In the example above: 24.53.32.4.) This IP address is the actual IP address of the server mail, or any other word or value you have pinged. Step Two: Pinging for a Web Address While the IP address returned above would work as your e-mail server address, it may not be permanent. IP addresses change all the time. Web addresses, how-

ever, usually dont. Because of this, youre likely to have fewer problems by configuring your system with web addresses rather than IP addresses. Follow the instructions below to find the web address assigned to the IP address you just pinged. 1. At the DOS command prompt, type ping -a 24.53.32.4, where 24.53.32.4 is the IP address you just pinged. Information such as the fol-

lowing data will be displayed. 73 74 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch C:\>ping -a 24.53.32.4 Pinging mail.msnv3.occa.home.com [24.53.32.4] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 24.53.32.4: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=127 Reply from 24.53.32.4: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=127 Reply from 24.53.32.4: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=127 Reply from 24.53.32.4: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=127 Ping statistics for 24.53.32.4:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0%

loss), Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:

Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms 2. Write down the web address returned by the ping command (in the example above: mail.msnv3.occa.home.com.). This web address is the web address assigned to the IP address you just pinged. While the IP address of mail could conceivably change, it is likely that this web address will not. 3. Replace your ISPs abbreviated server address with this extended web address in the corresponding Internet application (web browser, e-mail application, etc.). Once you have replaced the brief server address with the true server address, the Router should have no problem accessing the Internet through that Internet application. Appendix C: Configuring Wireless Security Note: WEP encryption is an additional data securi-

bit WEP encrypted wireless network. Therefore, make sure that all of your wireless devices are using the same encryption level. All wireless devices com-

plying with the 802.11b standard will support 64-bit WEP. In addition to enabling WEP, Linksys also recommends the following security implementations:

Changing the SSID from the default linksys Changing the WEP key regularly Note: In order for WEP Encryption to be enabled, wireless functions must first be enabled. Select Enable under the Wireless section before proceeding. 75 76 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch The following steps will show you how to utilize WEP encryption 1. From the Web-based Utilitys Setup tab, select Mandatory under the WEP section. 2. Press the WEP Key Setting button to set the WEP Encryption type and level. 3. The screen dis-

played in Figure C-1 may appear, verifying that you are enabling WEP Encryption. Press the OK button to continue. Figure C-1 4. This will display the screen shown in Figure C-2. From this screen, you will choose your WEP Encryption settings. WEP (64Bit or 128B) Select the level of encryption from the drop-down box. 128-bit WEP encryption is unique to Linksys and may conflict with other vendors WEP encryption. Note: In order to utilize WEP encryption, all points in your wireless network must have WEP enabled and be set to the same Key Setting. The WEP Encryption key is generated in one of two ways:

erated by the Router will be called a 40 bits (10 digits) key. Figure C-2 77 78 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Configuring Wireless Security in Windows XP As Windows XP does not allow for the use of the Linksys Passphrase feature with the wireless PC adapters, you will need to manually enter the key gener-

ated in the previous section. The following steps will help you enable WEP and enter the encryption key manually for your wireless PC cards, in order to enable your Windows XP sys-

tem to communicate with the Router wirelessly. These steps assume that your CD-ROM drive is letter D and that you are run-

ning Windows XP in the default mode. Be sure you have the WEP Key generated by the Router. 2. In the Control Panel window, click the Network and Internet Connections icon, shown in Figure C-4. Figure C-4 1. As shown in Figure C-3, click the Start button and go to the Control Panel. 3. Click the Network Connections icon, shown in Figure C-5. Figure C-3 Figure C-5 4. The Network Connections window will appear, as shown in Figure C-6. Under LAN or High-Speed Internet you will see all Network cards that are installed and operating in your computer. Double-click the Wireless Network Connection icon associated with your wireless adapter. If the Wireless Network Connection Status window appears, continue to the next step 79 80 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch If a Connect to Wireless Network window appears, in the Available Networks section, click the desired wireless network, specified by the Routers SSID. Then, double-click the Wireless Network Connection icon. 6. When the Wireless Network Connection Properties window appears, as in Figure C-

8, click the Wireless Networks Tab. Figure C-6 5. When the Wireless Network Connection Status window appears, as in Figure C-7, click the Properties button. Figure C-8 7. in If the appropriate wire-

less network, specified by the Routers SSID, is displayed the Preferred networks section, as shown in Figure C-9, double-

click it and continue to the next step. Otherwise, click on the appropriate wireless network, specified by the Routers SSID, in the net-

works section. Then, the Configure click button Available Figure C-9 82 Figure C-7 81 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch 8. The Wireless Network Properties window (shown in Figure C-10) will appear. Click the check box for the Data encryption (WEP enabled) option. Remove the check from the Network Authentication (Shared mode) and The key is provided for me automatically fields. In the "Network key" field, enter the exact Key (all 10 or 26 digits, depend-

ing on the level of encryption) generated by the Router. Verify that the Key format field displays Hexadecimal digits and that the Key length field displays either 40 bits (10 digits) or 104 bits (26 digits). If this is not displayed, you have entered the key incorrectly. Appendix D: Finding the MAC Address and IP Address for Your Ethernet Adapter This section describes how to find the MAC address for your Ethernet adapter to do either MAC Filtering or MAC Address Cloning for the Router and ISP. You can also find the IP address of your computers Ethernet adapter. The IP address is used for filtering, forwarding, and DMZ. Follow these steps to find the MAC address or IP address for your adapter in Windows 95, 98, ME, NT, 2000, and XP. For Windows 95, 98, and ME:

1. Click on Start and Run. In the Open field, enter winipcfg, as shown in Figure D-1. Then press the Enter key or the OK button. Figure D-1 2. When the IP Configuration window appears, as shown in Figure D-2, select the Ethernet adapter you are using to connect to the Router via a CAT 5 Ethernet cable. Figure C-10 Click the OK button to save the settings. Click on OK buttons until you get back to the Wireless Network Connection Status window. Close any open windows to get back to the Windows XP desktop. Close any applications and reboot your PC. After reboot, WEP configuration is complete and you should be able to connect wirelessly to the Router. 83 Figure D-2 84 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch 3. Write down the Adapter Address as shown on your computer screen (see Figure D-3). This is the MAC address for your Ethernet adapter and will be shown as a series of numbers and letters. The MAC address/Adapter Address is what you will use for MAC Address Cloning or MAC Filtering. 2. In the command prompt, enter ipconfig /all. Then press the Enter key. Figure D-3 The example in Figure F-3 shows the IP address of your Ethernet adapter as 192.168.1.100. Your computer may show something different. Note: The MAC address is also called the Adapter Address. For Windows NT, 2000, and XP:

Figure D-5 3. Write down the Physical Address as shown on your computer screen; it is the MAC address for your Ethernet adapter. This will appear as a series of letters and numbers. The following steps show an alternative way of obtaining the MAC address and IP address for your Ethernet adapter. The MAC address/Physical Address is what you will use for MAC Address Cloning or MAC Filtering. 1. Click on Start and Run. In the Open field, enter cmd, as shown in Figure D-4. Press the Enter key or click the OK button. Note: The MAC address is also called the Physical Address. The example in Figure D-5 shows the IP address of your Ethernet adapter as 192.168.1.100. Your computer may show something different. Figure D-4 85 86 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch When entering the information using the Routers web-based utility, you will type the 12-digit MAC address in this format, XXXXXXXXXXXX without the hyphens for MAC Filtering. See Figure D-6. Figure D-6 When entering information for MAC Address Cloning, type the 12-digit MAC address (see Figure D-7). Appendix E: Setting Up AOL Broadband Cable & DSL This document provides instructions for setting up the Router using firmware version 1.43 or above to work with AOL Broadband via a Cable or DSL con-

nection. This Router's AOL Parental Controls feature is available for AOL cus-

tomers in the US only. Please follow the instructions in the appropriate section below to configure for AOL Broadband for the type of broadband connection you have. Note: You must install AOL 7.0 or above to all computers using AOL Services. Those with earlier versions of AOL can find details at AOL Keyword: Linksys Setup. Note: Some of the screens in this section may look slightly different than what appears on your screen. AOL Broadband via Cable 1. Open your web browser. Enter http://192.168.1.1 the web browsers Address field, as shown in Figure E-1, and press the Enter key. in Figure E-1 2. A password request page, shown in Figure E-2 will appear. (Windows XP users will see a Connect to 192.168.1.1 window slightly different from that shown). Leave the User Name field blank, and enter admin in the Password field. Then click the OK button. Ro Figure D-7 87 Figure E-2 88 3. From the Setup screen that appears, shown in Figure E-3, select Obtain an IP automatically from the WAN Connection Type drop-down menu. Then, click the Security tab. 4. Select Enable for A O L P a r e n t a l Controls from the Security tab, shown in Figure E-4, and click the OK button on the screen that appears. Enabling this will disable all options under the tab Advanced except MAC Address cloning. Then, click the OK button to save these settings. Click the X button on the top right side of the win-

dow to close it. 89 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch AOL Broadband via DSL 1. Open your web browser. Enter http://192.168.1.1 the web browsers Address field, as shown in Figure E-5, and press the Enter key. in see a Connect 2. A password request page, shown in Figure E-6 will appear. (Windows XP users will to 192.168.1.1 window slightly different from that shown). Leave the User Name field blank, and enter admin in the Password field. Then click the OK button. Figure E-5 Figure E-6 Figure E-3 3. From the Setup screen that appears, shown in Figure E-7, select PPPoE from the WAN Connection Type drop-down menu. Enter america online for the User Name. In the password field, multiple asterisks will appear. Keep these settings and click the Apply button to save them. Click the X button on the top right side of the window to close it. Figure E-4 Note: AOL Parental Controls are available to AOL customers in the Unites States Only. Figure E-7 90 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Appendix F: Glossary 10BaseT - An Ethernet standard that uses twisted wire pairs. 100BaseTX - IEEE physical layer specification for 100 Mbps over two pairs of Category 5 wire. Adapter - Printed circuit board that plugs into a PC to add to capabilities or connectivity to a PC. In a networked environment, a network interface card is the typical adapter that allows the PC or server to connect to the intranet and/or Internet. Ad-hoc Network - An ad-hoc network is a group of computers, each with a wireless adapter, connected as an independent 802.11 wireless LAN. Ad-hoc wireless computers operate on a peer-to-peer basis, communicating directly with each other without the use of an access point. Ad-hoc mode is also referred to as an Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS) or as peer-to-peer mode. AppleTalk - An Apple Computer networking system that support Apple's pro-

prietary local talk. Auto-negotiate - To automatically determine the correct settings. The term is often used with communications and networking. For example, Ethernet 10/100 cards, hubs and switches can determine the highest speed of the node they are connected to and adjust their transmission rate accordingly. Backbone - The part of a network that connects most of the systems and net-

works together and handles the most data. Bandwidth - The transmission capacity of a given facility, in terms of how much data the facility can transmit in a fixed amount of time; expressed in bits per second (bps). Beacon Interval - A beacon is a packet broadcast by the Access Point to keep the network synchronized. A beacon includes the wireless LAN service area, the AP address, the Broadcast destination addresses, a time stamp, Delivery Traffic Indicator Maps, and the Traffic Indicator Message (TIM). Bit - A binary digit. The value - 0 or 1-used in the binary numbering system. Also, the smallest form of data. Boot - To cause the computer to start executing instructions. Personal comput-

ers contain built-in instructions in a ROM chip that are automatically executed on startup. These instructions search for the operating system, load it and pass control to it. Broadband - A data-transmission scheme in which multiple signals share the bandwidth of a medium. This allows the transmission of voice, data and video signals over a single medium. Cable television uses broadband techniques to deliver dozens of channels over one cable. Browser - A browser is an application program that provides a way to look at and interact with all the information on the World Wide Web or PC. The word

"browser" seems to have originated prior to the Web as a generic term for user interfaces that let you browse text files online. BSS (Basic Service Set) - An infrastructure network connecting wireless devices to a wired network using a single access point. Buffer - A buffer is a shared or assigned memory area used by hardware devices or program processes that operate at different speeds or with different sets of priorities. The buffer allows each device or process to operate without being held up by the other. In order for a buffer to be effective, the size of the buffer and the algorithms for moving data into and out of the buffer need to be considered by the buffer designer. Like a cache, a buffer is a "midpoint holding place" but exists not so much to accelerate the speed of an activity as to sup-

port the coordination of separate activities. Cable Modem - A device that connects a computer to the cable television net-

work, which in turn connects to the Internet. Once connected, cable modem users have a continuous connection to the Internet. Cable modems feature asymmetric transfer rates: around 36 Mbps downstream (from the Internet to the computer), and from 200 Kbps to 2 Mbps upstream (from the computer to the Internet). CAT 5 - ANSI/EIA (American National Standards Institute/Electronic Industries Association) Standard 568 is one of several standards that specify

"categories" (the singular is commonly referred to as "CAT") of twisted pair 91 92 cabling systems (wires, junctions, and connectors) in terms of the data rates that they can sustain. CAT 5 cable has a maximum throughput of 100 Mbps and is usually utilized for 100BaseTX networks. cially useful in education and other environments where users change fre-

quently. Using very short leases, DHCP can dynamically reconfigure networks in which there are more computers than there are available IP addresses. Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch CAT 5e - The additional cabling performance parameters of return loss and far-

end crosstalk (FEXT) specified for 1000BASE-T and not specified for 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX are related to differences in the signaling imple-

mentation. 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX signaling is unidirectional-signals are transmitted in one direction on a single wire pair. In contrast, Gigabit Ethernet is bi-directional-signals are transmitted simultaneously in both direc-

tions on the same wire pair; that is, both the transmit and receive pair occupy the same wire pair. CSMA/CA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Avoidance) - In local area networking, this is the CSMA technique that combines slotted time-divi-

sion multiplexing with carrier sense multiple access/collision detection

(CSMA/CD) to avoid having collisions occur a second time. This works best if the time allocated is short compared to packet length and if the number of sit-

uations is small. Data Packet - One frame in a packet-switched message. Most data communi-

cations is based on dividing the transmitted message into packets. For example, an Ethernet packet can be from 64 to 1518 bytes in length. Default Gateway - The routing device used to forward all traffic that is not addressed to a station within the local subnet. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) - A protocol that lets network administrators manage centrally and automate the assignment of Internet Protocol (IP) addresses in an organization's network. Using the Internet's set of protocol (TCP/IP), each machine that can connect to the Internet needs a unique IP address. When an organization sets up its computer users with a con-

nection to the Internet, an IP address must be assigned to each machine. Without DHCP, the IP address must be entered manually at each computer and, if computers move to another location in another part of the network, a new IP address must be entered. DHCP lets a network administrator supervise and dis -

tribute IP addresses from a central point and automatically sends a new IP address when a computer is plugged into a different place in the network. DHCP uses the concept of a "lease" or amount of time that a given IP address will be valid for a computer. The lease time can vary depending on how long a user is likely to require the Internet connection at a particular location. It's espe-

DHCP supports static addresses for computers containing Web servers that need a permanent IP address. DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) - Allows one IP address (or computer) to be exposed to the Internet. Some applications require multiple TCP/IP ports to be open. It is recommended that you set your computer with a static IP address if you want to use DMZ Hosting. DNS - The domain name system (DNS) is the way that Internet domain name are located and translated into Internet Protocol (IP) addresses. A domain name is a meaningful and easy-to-remember "handle" for an Internet address. Domain - A subnetwork comprised of a group of clients and servers under the control of one security database. Dividing LANs into domains improves per-

formance and security. Download - To receive a file transmitted over a network. In a communications session, download means receive, upload means transmit. DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) - A technology that dramatically increases the digital capacity of ordinary telephone lines into the home or office and, by employing unused bandwidth, still allows for normal phone usage. DSL pro-

vides "always-on" operation, eliminating the need to dial in to the service. DSSS (Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum) - DSSS generates a redundant bit pattern for all data transmitted. This bit pattern is called a chip (or chipping code). Even if one or more bits in the chip are damaged during transmission, statistical techniques embedded in the receiver can recover the original data without the need for retransmission. To an unintended receiver, DSSS appears as low power wideband noise and is rejected (ignored) by most narrowband receivers. However, to an intended receiver (i.e. another wireless LAN end-

point), the DSSS signal is recognized as the only valid signal, and interference is inherently rejected (ignored). DTIM (Delivery Traffic Indication Message) - A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and mul-

ticast messages. When the AP has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for 93 94 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch associated clients, it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value. AP Clients hear the beacons and awaken to receive the broadcast and multicast messages. Dynamic IP Address - An IP address that is automatically assigned to a client station in a TCP/IP network, typically by a DHCP server. Network devices that serve multiple users, such as servers and printers, are usually assigned static IP addresses. Dynamic Routing - The ability for a router to forward data via a different route based on the current conditions of the communications circuits. For example, it can adjust for overloaded traffic or failing lines and is much more flexible than static routing, which uses a fixed forwarding path. Encryption - A security method that applies a specific algorithm to data in order to alter the data's appearance and prevent other devices from reading the information. ESS (Extended Service Set) - A set of more than two or more BSSs (multiple access points) forming a single network. Ethernet - IEEE standard network protocol that specifies how data is placed on and retrieved from a common transmission medium. Has a transfer rate of 10 Mbps. Forms the underlying transport vehicle used by several upper-level protocols, including TCP/IP and XNS. Fast Ethernet - A 100 Mbps technology based on the 10Base-T Ethernet CSMA/CD network access method. FHSS (Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum) - FHSS continuously changes

(hops) the carrier frequency of a conventional carrier several times per second according to a pseudo-random set of channels. Because a fixed frequency is not used, and only the transmitter and receiver know the hop patterns, interception of FHSS is extremely difficult. Finger - A UNIX command widely used on the Internet to find out informa-

tion about a particular user, such as telephone number, whether currently logged on or the last time logged on. The person being "fingered" must have placed his or her profile on the system. Fingering requires entering the full user@domain address. Firewall - A firewall is a set of related programs, located at a network gateway server, that protects the resources of a network from users from other networks.

(The term also implies the security policy that is used with the programs.) An enterprise with an intranet that allows its workers access to the wider Internet installs a firewall to prevent outsiders from accessing its own private data resources and for controlling what outside resources to which its own users have access. Basically, a firewall, working closely with a router, examines each network packet to determine whether to forward it toward its destination. Firmware - Code that is written onto read-only memory (ROM) or program-

mable read-only memory (PROM). Once firmware has been written onto the ROM or PROM, it is retained even when the device is turned off. Fragmentation - Breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that cannot support the original size of the packet. FTP (File Transfer Protocol) - A protocol used to transfer files over a TCP/IP network (Internet, UNIX, etc.). For example, after developing the HTML pages for a Web site on a local machine, they are typically uploaded to the Web serv-

er using FTP. FTP includes functions to log onto the network, list directories and copy files. It can also convert between the ASCII and EBCDIC character codes. FTP oper-

ations can be performed by typing commands at a command prompt or via an FTP utility running under a graphical interface such as Windows. FTP transfers can also be initiated from within a Web browser by entering the URL preceded with ftp://. Unlike e-mail programs in which graphics and program files have to be

"attached," FTP is designed to handle binary files directly and does not add the overhead of encoding and decoding the data. Full Duplex - The ability of a device or line to transmit data simultaneously in both directions. Gateway - A device that interconnects networks with different, incompatible communications protocols. Half Duplex - Data transmission that can occur in two directions over a single line, but only one direction at a time. 95 96 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Hardware - Hardware is the physical aspect of computers, telecommunica-

tions, and other information technology devices. The term arose as a way to dis -

tinguish the "box" and the electronic circuitry and components of a computer from the program you put in it to make it do things. The program came to be known as the software. Hop - The link between two network nodes. HTTP (HyperText Transport Protocol) - The communications protocol used to connect to servers on the World Wide Web. Its primary function is to estab-

lish a connection with a Web server and transmit HTML pages to the client browser. Hub - The device that serves as the central location for attaching wires from workstations. Can be passive, where there is no amplification of the signals; or active, where the hubs are used like repeaters to provide an extension of the cable that connects to a workstation. ICQ - A conferencing program for the Internet that provides interactive chat, e-mail and file transfer and can alert you when someone on your predefined list has also come online. IEEE (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) - The IEEE describes itself as "the world's largest technical professional society, promoting the development and application of electrotechnology and allied sciences for the benefit of humanity, the advancement of the profession, and the well-being of our members."

The IEEE fosters the development of standards that often become national and international standards. The organization publishes a number of journals, has many local chapters, and several large societies in special areas, such as the IEEE Computer Society. Infrastructure Network - An infrastructure network is a group of computers or other devices, each with a wireless adapter, connected as an 802.11 wireless LAN. In infrastructure mode, the wireless devices communicate with each other and to a wired network by first going through an access point. An infra-

structure wireless network connected to a wired network is referred to as a Basic Service Set (BSS). A set of two or more BSS in a single network is referred to as an Extended Service Set (ESS). Infrastructure mode is useful at a corporation scale, or when it is necessary to connect the wired and wireless networks. IP Address - In the most widely installed level of the Internet Protocol

(Internet Protocol) today, an IP address is a 32-binary digit number that identi-

fies each sender or receiver of information that is sent in packet across the Internet. When you request an HTML page or send e-mail, the Internet Protocol part of TCP/IP includes your IP address in the message (actually, in each of the packets if more than one is required) and sends it to the IP address that is obtained by looking up the domain name in the Uniform Resource Locator you requested or in the e-mail address you're sending a note to. At the other end, the recipient can see the IP address of the Web page requestor or the e-mail sender and can respond by sending another message using the IP address it received. IPCONFIG - A Windows NT or 2000 utility that provides for querying, defin-

ing and managing IP addresses within a network. A commonly used utility for configuring networks with static IP addresses. IPSec (Internet Protocol Security) - A suite of protocols used to implement secure exchange of packets at the IP layer. IPSec supports two basic modes:

Transport and Tunnel. Transport encrypts the payload of each packet, leaving the header untouched, while Tunnel mode encrypts both the header and the pay-

load and is therefore more secure. IPSec must be supported on both transmit-

ter and receiver and must share a public key. Tunnel mode is widely deployed in VPNs (Virtual Private Networks). IPX (Internetwork Packet EXchange) - A NetWare communications protocol used to route messages from one node to another. IPX packets include network addresses and can be routed from one network to another. ISM band - The FCC and their counterparts outside of the U.S. have set aside bandwidth for unlicensed use in the ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band. Spectrum in the vicinity of 2.4 GHz, in particular, is being made avail-

able worldwide. This presents a truly revolutionary opportunity to place con-

venient high-speed wireless capabilities in the hands of users around the globe. ISP - An ISP (Internet service provider) is a company that provides individuals and companies access to the Internet and other related services such as Web site building and virtual hosting. LAN - A local area network (LAN) is a group of computers and associated devices that share a common communications line and typically share the resources of a single processor or server within a small geographic area (for example, within an office building). 97 98 MAC (Media Access Control) Address - A unique number assigned by the manufacturer to any Ethernet networking device, such as a network adapter, that allows the network to identify it at the hardware level. Plug-and-Play - The ability of a computer system to configure expansion boards and other devices automatically without requiring the user to turn off the system during installation. Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Mbps (MegaBits Per Second) - One million bits per second; unit of measure-

ment for data transmission. MIB (Management Information Base) - A set of database objects. This set con-

tains information about a specific device for utilizing SNMP. mIRC - mIRC runs under Windows and provides a graphical interface for log-

ging onto IRC servers and listing, joining and leaving channels. Multicasting - Sending data to a group of nodes instead of a single destination. NAT (Network Address Translation) - The translation of an Internet Protocol address (IP address) used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. One network is designated the inside network and the other is the outside. Network - A system that transmits any combination of voice, video and/or data between users. NNTP (Network News Transfer Protocol) - The protocol used to connect to Usenet groups on the Internet. Usenet newsreaders support the NNTP protocol. Node - A network junction or connection point, typically a computer or work station. Packet - A unit of data routed between an origin and a destination in a network. Passphrase - Used much like a password, a passphrase simplifies the WEP encryption process by automatically generating the WEP encryption keys for Linksys products. PC Card - A credit-card sized removable module that contains memory, I/O, or a hard disk. Ping (Packet INternet Groper) - An Internet utility used to determine whether a particular IP address is online. It is used to test and debug a network by send-

ing out a packet and waiting for a response. Port - A pathway into and out of the computer or a network device such as a switch or router. For example, the serial and parallel ports on a personal com-

puter are external sockets for plugging in communications lines, modems and printers. PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) - PPPoE is a method for the encapsulation of PPP packets over Ethernet frames from the user to the ISP over the Internet. One reason PPPoE is preferred by ISPs is because it provides authentication (username and password) in addition to data transport. A PPPoE session can be initiated by either a client application residing on a PC, or by client firmware residing on a modem or router. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) - A protocol (set of communication rules) that allows corporations to extend their own corporate network through private "tunnels" over the public Internet. Effectively, a corporation uses a wide-area network as a single large local area network. A company no longer needs to lease its own lines for wide-area communication but can securely use the public networks. This kind of interconnection is known as a virtual private network. RIP (Routing Information Protocol) - A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routine-

ly broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers. RJ-45 (Registered Jack-45) - A connector similar to a telephone connector that holds up to eight wires, used for connecting Ethernet devices. Roaming - In an infrastructure mode wireless network, this refers to the abili-

ty to move out of one access point's range and into another and transparently reassociate and reauthenticate to the new access point. This reassociation and reauthentication should occur without user intervention and ideally without interruption to network connectivity. A typical scenario would be a location with multiple access points, where users can physically relocate from one area to another and easily maintain connectivity. 99 100 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Router - Protocol-dependent device that connects subnetworks together. Routers are useful in breaking down a very large network into smaller subnet-

works; they introduce longer delays and typically have much lower throughput rates than bridges. RTS (Request To Send) - An RS-232 signal sent from the transmitting station to the receiving station requesting permission to transmit. Server - Any computer whose function in a network is to provide user access to files, printing, communications, and other services. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) - The standard e-mail protocol on the Internet. It is a TCP/IP protocol that defines the message format and the mes -

sage transfer agent (MTA), which stores and forwards the mail. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) - A widely used network monitoring and control protocol. Data is passed from SNMP agents, which are hardware and/or software processes reporting activity in each network device

(hub, router, bridge, etc.) to the workstation console used to oversee the net-

work. The agents return information contained in a MIB (Management Information Base), which is a data structure that defines what is obtainable from the device and what can be controlled (turned off, on, etc.). Software - Instructions for the computer. A series of instructions that performs a particular task is called a "program." The two major categories of software are

"system software" and "application software." System software is made up of control programs such as the operating system and database management sys-

tem (DBMS). Application software is any program that processes data for the user. A common misconception is that software is data. It is not. Software tells the hardware how to process the data. Spread Spectrum - Spread Spectrum technology is a wideband radio frequen-

cy technique developed by the military for use in reliable, secure, mission-crit-

ical communications systems. It is designed to trade off bandwidth efficiency for reliability, integrity, and security. In other words, more bandwidth is con-

sumed than in the case of narrowband transmission, but the trade off produces a signal that is, in effect, louder and thus easier to detect, provided that the receiver knows the parameters of the spread-spectrum signal being broadcast. If a receiver is not tuned to the right frequency, a spread-spectrum signal looks like background noise. There are two main alternatives, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) and Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS). SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection) - A firewall technology that monitors the state of the transaction so that it can verify that the destination of an inbound pack-

et matches the source of a previous outbound request. It examines not just the headers of the packet, but also the contents, to determine more about the pack-

et than just its source and destination information. It is called "stateful" because verifies that the stated destination computer has previously requested the cur-

rent communication. In this way, it verifies that all communications are initiat-

ed by the recipient computer and are taking place only with sources that are known and trusted from previous interactions. In addition to being a more rig-

orous inspection, stateful packet inspection closes off ports until connection to the specific port is requested. This allows an added layer of protection from the threat of port scanning. SSID (Service Set IDentifier) - A unique name shared among all points in a wireless network. The SSID must be identical for each point in the wireless net-

work and is case-sensitive. Static IP Address - A permanent IP address that is assigned to a node in an IP or a TCP/IP network. Static Routing - Forwarding data in a network via a fixed path. Static routing cannot adjust to changing line conditions as can dynamic routing. Subnet Mask - The method used for splitting IP networks into a series of sub-

groups, or subnets. The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address to turn part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets. Switch - 1. A data switch connects computing devices to host computers, allowing a large number of devices to share a limited number of ports. 2. A device for making, breaking, or changing the connections in an electrical cir-

cuit. TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) - A method (protocol) used along with the IP (Internet Protocol) to send data in the form of message units (datagram) between network devices over a LAN or WAN. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery of the data (routing), TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for effi-

101 102 Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch cient delivery over the network. TCP is known as a "connection oriented" pro-

tocol due to requiring the receiver of a packet to return an acknowledgment of receipt to the sender of the packet resulting in transmission control. TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) - The basic com-

munication language or set of protocols for communications over a network

(developed specifically for the Internet). TCP/IP defines a suite or group of protocols and not only TCP and IP. Telnet - A terminal emulation protocol commonly used on the Internet and TCP/IP-based networks. It allows a user at a terminal or computer to log onto a remote device and run a program. TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) - A version of the TCP/IP FTP protocol that has no directory or password capability. Throughput - The amount of data moved successfully from one place to another in a given time period. TX Rate - Transmission Rate. UDP (User Datagram Protocol) - A method (protocol) used along with the IP

(Internet Protocol) to send data in the form of message units (datagram) between network devices over a LAN or WAN. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery of the data (routing), UDP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for effi-

cient delivery over the network. UDP is known as a "connection-less" protocol due to NOT requiring the receiver of a packet to return an acknowledgment of receipt to the sender of the packet (as opposed to TCP). Upgrade - To replace existing software or firmware with a newer version. Upload - To transmit a file over a network. In a communications session, upload means transmit, download means receive. URL (Uniform Resource Locator) - The address that defines the route to a file on the Web or any other Internet facility. URLs are typed into the browser to access Web pages, and URLs are embedded within the pages themselves to pro-

vide the hypertext links to other pages. UTP - Unshielded twisted pair is the most common kind of copper telephone wiring. Twisted pair is the ordinary copper wire that connects home and many business computers to the telephone company. To reduce crosstalk or electro-

magnetic induction between pairs of wires, two insulated copper wires are twisted around each other. Each signal on twisted pair requires both wires. Since some telephone sets or desktop locations require multiple connections, twisted pair is sometimes installed in two or more pairs, all within a single cable. VPN (Virtual Private Network) - A technique that allows two or more LANs to be extended over public communication channels by creating private commu-

nication subchannels (tunnels). Effectively, these LANs can use a WAN as a single large "virtually private" LAN. This removes the need to use leased lines for WAN communications through secure use of a publicly available WAN

(such as the Internet). Examples of VPN technology are: PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol), L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), and IPSec (Internet Protocol Security). WAN (Wide Area Network)- A communications network that covers a rela-

tively large geographic area, consisting of two or more LANs. Broadband communication over the WAN is often through public networks such as the telephone (DSL) or cable systems, or through leased lines or satellites. In its most basic definition, the Internet could be considered a WAN. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) - A data privacy mechanism based on a 64-

bit or 128-bit shared key algorithm, as described in the IEEE 802.11 standard. WINIPCFG - Configuration utility based on the Win32 API for querying, defining and managing IP addresses within a network. A commonly used util-

ity for configuring networks with static IP addresses. 103 104 Appendix G: Specifications Environmental Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Dimensions 186mm x 154mm x 62mm (7.31" x 6.06" x 2.44") Unit Weight 0.56 kg. (19.2 oz.) Power Input External, 5V DC, 2.5A Certifications FCC Class B, CE Mark Operating Temperature 0C to 40C (32F to 104F) Storage Temperature

-20C to 70C (-4F to 158F) Operating Humidity 10% to 85%, Non-Condensing Storage Humidity 5% to 90%, Non-Condensing Standards Protocol Ports WAN:

LAN:

Speed (Mbps) IEEE 802.3 (10BaseT), IEEE 802.3u

(100BaseTX), IEEE 802.11b (Wireless) CSMA/CD One 10Base-T RJ-45 Port for cable or DSL Modem Four 10/100 RJ-45 Switched Ports, One Shared Uplink Port WAN:

LAN:

10 (Half Duplex) 10/100 (Half Duplex) 20/200 (Full Duplex) Cabling Type UTP Category 5 or better Button TX Power Reset 19 dbm Throughput (average) 4.2 Mbps Receiver Sensitivity (Typical) Topology LED Indicators WAN LAN Connectors 1Mbps 0-5 BER @ -89dbm 5.5Mbps 10-5 BER @ -83dbm 11Mbps 10-5 BER @ -79dbm Star (Ethernet) Power, WLAN Activity, WLAN Link Link/Activity, Diag for WAN Full Duplex/Collision, Link/Activity 100 2 Antenna Connectors 105 106 Appendix H: Contact Information Appendix I: Warranty Information Instant WirelessTM Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch For help with installation or operation of this product, contact Linksys Technical Support at one of the phone numbers listed in the Technical Support insert or Internet addresses below:

E-mail Europe United Kingdom & Ireland Latin America U.S. and Canada europe-support@linksys.com uks@linksys.com latam-soporte@linksys.com support@linksys.com For unlisted regions or updated contact information please visit the website below:

Web http://www.linksys.com/international LIMITED WARRANTY Linksys guarantees that every Instant Wireless Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch is free from physical defects in material and workmanship for two years from the date of purchase (Africa, Europe and Latin America only, other regions may have a dif-

ferent warranty period), when used within the limits set forth in the Specifications section of this User Guide. If you suspect the product is defective during the warranty period, contact the Linksys Technical Support in order to obtain a Return Authorization number

(RMA) or contact the location where the product was purchased (if applicable). BE SURE TO HAVE YOUR PROOF OF PURCHASE ON HAND WHEN CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT. RETURN REQUESTS CANNOT BE PROCESSED WITHOUT PROOF OF PUR-

CHASE. IN NO EVENT SHALL LINKSYS LIABILITY EXCEED THE PRICE PAID FOR THE PROD-

UCT FROM DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-

AGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, ITS ACCOMPANYING SOFT-

WARE, OR ITS DOCUMENTATION. LINKSYS OFFERS NO REFUNDS FOR ITS PROD-

UCTS. Linksys makes no warranty or representation, expressed, implied, or statutory, with respect to its products or the contents or use of this documentation and all accom-

panying software, and specifically disclaims its quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular purpose. Linksys reserves the right to revise or update its prod-

ucts, software, or documentation without obligation to notify any individual or entity. Please direct all inquiries to the address listed below or contact Technical support:

exhibit
download
text

users manual 2

Users Manual

pdf

2.67 MiB

Instant Wireless Series Wireless Access Point Router with 4-Port Switch Use this Guide to install: